Table of Contents
Feature Index

DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual1.

Preparation2.

Shooting

3.

Playback

4.

Menu functions

5.

Connecting the camera to asmartphone

6.

Connecting the camera to acomputer

7.

Cautions

8.

Information

9.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Additions/modifications by

10. firmware update

Model No. : IM016
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before using
this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, thecontents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.

Product Manuals
Product Manuals

In addition to the “Instruction Manual”, we also offer a “Camera Function Guide”.
Consult these manuals when using the product.
Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from the OLYMPUS website or directly
using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) smartphone app.

Camera Function Guide
A function and setting guide that helps you use camera features to the full. It has been
optimized for display on mobile devices and can be viewed using OI.Share.
https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/jp/support/cs/webmanual/index.html

Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.

$
%
g
2 EN

Notes and other supplementary information.
Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.
References to other pages in this manual.

Table of Contents
2

Before You Begin

9

Feature Index

10

Names of parts

14

1. Preparation

16

Unpacking the box contents .....16
Attaching the Strap ....................17
Charging and inserting
the battery ...................................18
Inserting the card .......................21
Attaching a lens tothe camera ..................................23
Removing Lenses.......................24
Using the monitor.......................25
Turning the camera on ...............26
Sleep Mode ..................................26
Initial setup .................................27
What to Do If You Can’t Readthe Display ..................................29

2. Shooting

30

Information displays whileshooting ......................................30

Shooting still pictures................34
Shooting with touch screen
operations.....................................36
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter
speed (P: Program AE) ................37
Choosing aperture(A: Aperture-Priority AE) ..............39
Choosing shutter speed(S: Shutter-Priority AE) ................41
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M: Manual Exposure).......43
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)...45
Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)..............47
Letting the camera choose thesettings (AUTO mode)..................49
Shooting in scene mode
(SCN mode).................................50
Types of scene modes .................51
Using art filters (ART mode) ........55
Custom Mode (C mode) ...............57

Table of Contents

Product Manuals

Recording Movies ......................58
Recording movies in photoshooting modes ............................58
Recording movies in movie mode(n) ..............................................59
Silencing Camera Sounds While
Shooting Movies ...........................61

Switching between displays......32
Switching the information
display ..........................................33

EN 3

Table of Contents
4 EN

Shooting Settings.......................62
Direct Buttons ...............................63
Controlling exposure(Exposure Compensation) ........64
Choosing an AF Target Mode
(AF Target Mode)......................65
Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point) ......................66
Face priority AF/
Eye priority AF ..........................67
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF(Super Spot AF) ........................68
Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO) .........................................70
Locking the exposure(AE Lock) ..................................70
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................71
Self-Timer Options(c Custom Self-timer) ............73
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations (Anti-Shock r) ......73
Shooting without shutter sound(Silent s) ................................74
Shooting without a releasetime lag(Pro Capture shooting) .............74
Shooting still pictures in ahigher resolution(High Res Shot) ........................76
The Super Control/LV Super
Control Panel................................77
Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO) .........................................80
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................80
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness(Metering) .................................82

Adjusting color(WB (white balance)) ................83
Making fine adjustments towhite balance(WB Compensation) .................85
Reducing camera shake(Image Stabilizer) .....................86
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................87
Setting the image aspect ..........87
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) .......................88
Frame Size, Rate, andCompression (nK) ...............89
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion
Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion
Movies) .....................................92
Using a flash(Flash photography) .................93
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ............................94
Adjusting flash output(Flash intensity control) ............97
Processing options(Picture Mode) ..........................98
Adjusting overall color(Color Creator)........................100
Making fine adjustments to
sharpness (Sharpness) ..........101
Making fine adjustments tocontrast (Contrast) ..................101
Making fine adjustments tosaturation (Saturation) ............101
Making fine adjustments totone (Gradation) .....................102
Applying filter effects tomonochrome pictures(Color Filter)............................103

3. Playback

114

Information display during
playback .................................... 114
Playback image information ....... 114
Switching the information
display ........................................ 115
Viewing photographs andmovies ....................................... 116
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index
and Calendar Playback) ............. 117
Zooming In (Playback Zoom) ..... 117
Rotating Pictures (Rotate) .......... 117
Watching movies ........................ 118
Protecting Pictures (0) ........... 118
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ........... 119
Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order) ............................. 119
Selecting Multiple Pictures(0, Erase Selected, Share
Order Selected) .......................... 119
Print order (DPOF) .....................120
Adding Audio to Pictures (R) ......122

4. Menu functions

125

Basic menu operations ............125
Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ......................127
Restoring Default Settings(Reset)........................................127
Saving Settings(Assign to Custom Mode) ...........128
Processing options(Picture Mode) ............................129
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK).........................129
Digital Zoom
(Digital Tele-converter) ...............130
Shooting automatically with afixed interval(Time lapse shooting) .................131
Varying settings over a series ofphotographs (Bracketing) ...........132
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images (HDR) ................137
Recording multiple exposures ina single image(Multiple Exposure) ....................139
Keystone correction andperspective control(Keystone Comp.) ......................141
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting(Anti-Shock r/Silent s) ..........142
Setting high resolution shooting(High Res Shot) ..........................143
Shooting with remote control
wireless flash (#RC Mode)........143

Table of Contents

Adjusting the tone ofa monochrome image(Monochrome Color)...............104
Adjusting i-Enhance effects(Effect) ....................................104
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space) ..............105
Changing the brightnessof highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow Control) ...106
Assigning functions to buttons(Button Function) ....................107

Playback Using Touch
Controls.....................................123
Selecting and protecting
images ........................................124

EN 5

Table of Contents

Using the Video Menu ..............144
Choosing an Exposure Mode(n Mode (Movie Exposure
Modes)) ......................................147
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (n Flicker Scan) ..........148
Frame Size, Rate, andCompression (nK).................149
Sound Recording Options(Movie R) ...................................150
Using the Olympus LS-100 IC
Recorder.....................................151
Using the Playback Menu ........153
Automatically Rotating PortraitOrientation Pictures for Playback(R)............................................153
Retouching Pictures (Edit)..........153
Combining Pictures(Image Overlay)..........................155
Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture) ..........156
Trimming movies(Movie Trimming)........................157
Removing Protection from All
Pictures (Reset Protect) .............158
Cancelling a share order(Reset share Order) ...................158
Using the setup menu ..............159
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) ...............................160
Deleting all images(Card Setup) ...............................160
Wireless LAN Options (Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth Settings) .....................160

6 EN

Using the custom menus.........161
J AF/MF ...................................161
K AF/MF ...................................162
L AF/MF ...................................163
I AF/MF ...................................163
M Button/Dial/Lever ..................164
N Release/j/
Image Stabilizer..........................165
O Release/j/
Image Stabilizer..........................165
P Disp/8/PC ...........................166
Q Disp/8/PC ...........................167
R Disp/8/PC ...........................168
S Disp/8/PC ...........................168
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................169
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................170
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................170
W #Custom ..............................170
X K/WB/Color ........................171
Y Record/Erase ........................172
Z Record/Erase ........................173
a EVF .......................................173
b K Utility ...............................174
c K Utility ...............................174
Setting Focus and Exposure with
the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL) ............................175
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity(K C-AF Sensitivity) .................176
C-AF Starting Focus Target(K C-AF Center Start) ..............177
C-AF Center Target Priority(K C-AF Center Priority) ..........178
Choosing the AF Home Position(N Set Home) ..........................179

5. Connecting the camera
to a smartphone
200
Adjusting Settings forConnection toa Smartphone ...........................201
Wireless Settings for
When the Camera Is Off ...........202
Transferring images toa smartphone ............................203
Automatically uploading
images while the camera
is off ...........................................204

Table of Contents

Manual Focus Assist(MF Assist) .................................180
Adjusting Focus During
Exposures(Bulb/Time Focusing) .................180
Customizing the Fn Lever(K Fn Lever Function) ..............181
Burst Shooting Options(jL Settings/jH Settings) ....182
Reducing Flicker(Flicker Reduction) .....................184
Choosing the control panel
displays (K Control Settings) ...186
Adding information displays(G/Info Settings) .......................188
Choosing the Playback Zoom
Ratio (qa Default Setting)......189
Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist) .........190
Viewing camera images on TV(HDMI) ........................................191
Live Bulb Update Frequency(Live Bulb) ..................................192
Live Time Update Frequency(Live Time)..................................192
Choosing the Shutter Speed(Composite Settings) ..................193
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (K Flicker Scan) .........194
Shutter speeds when the flash
fires (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit) ....195
Combinations of JPEG image
sizes and compression rates(K Set) .....................................196
Saving lens info
(Lens Info Settings) ....................196
Selecting the display style of the
viewfinder (EVF Style) ................197
Correcting Fisheye Distortion(Fisheye Compensation) ............198

Shooting remotely witha smartphone ............................204
Adding position information toimages .......................................205
Resetting Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®
settings......................................206
Changing the password...........206
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® ......207

6. Connecting the camera
to a computer
208
Connecting the camera to
a computer ................................208
Copying pictures to
a computer ................................208
Installing the PC software .......209

EN 7

7. Cautions

210

Battery and charger .................210

9. SAFETY
PRECAUTIONSUsing your charger abroad ..... 211

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........246

Table of Contents

Usable cards ............................. 211
Interchangeable lenses............212
MF Clutch Lenses.....................213
Optional Accessories ...............214
Grip (ECG-5) ..............................214
Designated External Flash
Units ...........................................215
Wireless remote control flash
photography ...............................216
Other external flash units ...........218
System chart .............................220

8. Information

222

Cleaning and storing thecamera .......................................222
Cleaning the camera ..................222
Storage .......................................222
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device..............................223
Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions ........223
Shooting tips andinformation................................224
Error codes ...............................227
Default Settings ........................229
Record mode and file size/
number of storable still
pictures .....................................241
Specifications ...........................243

8 EN

246

10. Additions/modifications
by firmware update
251
Index

252

Before You Begin
Read and Follow Safety Precautions

While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be
sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Olympus will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use of thisproduct outside the country or region of purchase.
• Use of these features outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held
liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.

Before You Begin

To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fire or other damage to property or harm to
yourself or to others, read “9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 246) in its entirety before
using the camera.

Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®

The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features
outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; besure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held liable for theuser’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 207)
 User Registration
Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.

EN 9

Feature Indexg

Feature34

n AF/IS Settings

Custom Mode57

n AF Mode

80

Monitor Display

33, 115n Image Stabilizer

86

Viewfinder Display

197

n Button/Dial/Lever

Direct Button Functions

63

n Button Function

107

Live Controls

187

n Dial Function145

LV Super Control Panel77, 79n Fn Lever Function

145

n Shutter Function

145

n Elec. Zoom Speed

145

FeatureFeature Index

Shooting Mode

W Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes

127

Picture Mode98, 129

KK

88, 129n Display Settingsn Control Settings

146

Image Aspect

87

n Info Settings

146

Digital Tele-converter

130Time Code Settings

146

j/Y/i (Drive Mode)71, 73,131

X Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing

132

HDR

137

Multiple Exposure

139

Keystone Comp.

141

Anti-Shock r/Silent s

142

High Res Shot76, 143#RC Mode216

n Video Menu
n Mode Settingsn Mode147

n Flicker Scan

148

n Specification Settings

10 EN

g

nK

149

n Noise Filter

144

n Picture Mode

144

Movie R

150

n HDMI Output

146

q Playback Menu
R

153

Edit

153

Print Order

120

Reset Protect

158

Reset share Order

158

Device Connection

201

FeatureFeatureg

M Button/Dial/Lever
K Button Function

107

80

qR Function

164

K AEL/AFL

175

K Dial Function

164

AF Scanner

161

Dial Direction

164

K C-AF Sensitivity

176

K Fn Lever Function

181

K C-AF Center Start

177

Fn Lever/Power Lever

164

K C-AF Center Priority

178

K Elec. Zoom Speed164

J AF/MF
K AF Mode

Feature Indexg

G Custom Menu

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer

K AF/MF
NMode Settings

162

S-AF Release Priority

AF Area Pointer

162

C-AF Release Priority

AF Targeting Pad

162

jL Settings

N Set Home179

jH Settings

N Custom Settings

162

Flicker Reduction

165
182
184

O Release/j/Image Stabilizer

L AF/MF
AF Limiter

163

K Image Stabilizer

86

AF Illuminator

163

j Image Stabilizer

165

I Face Priority

67

Half Way Rls With IS

165

AF Focus Adj.

163

Lens I.S. Priority

165

I AF/MF
Preset MF distance163

MF Assist180

MF Clutch

163

Focus Ring

163

Bulb/Time Focusing

180

Reset Lens

163

EN 11

FeatureFeature Indexg

P Disp/8/PC
K Control Settings
G/Info Settingsg

186

Bulb/Time Timer

170

188, 189

Bulb/Time Monitor

170
192

Picture Mode Settings

166

Live Bulb

j/Y Settings

166

Live Time

192

Multi Function Settings

166

Composite Settings

193

K Flicker Scan

194

167

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p

Q Disp/8/PC
Live View Boost
Art LV Mode

167

Metering

82

LV Close Up Settings

167

AEL Metering

170

qa Default Setting

189

N Spot Metering

170z Settings

167

W #Custom#X-Sync.

R Disp/8/PC

195

Grid Settings

168#Slow Limit

195

Peaking Settings

168

x+F

170

Histogram Settings

188

#+WB

170

Mode Guide

168

Selfie Assist

190

S Disp/8/PC
8

168

HDMI

191

USB Mode168

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p

12 EN

FeatureU Exp/ISO/BULB/p

Exposure Shift169

EV Step

169

ISO Step

169

ISO-Auto Set

169

ISO-Auto

169

K Noise Filter

169

Noise Reduct.

169

X K/WB/ColorK Set

88, 129,
196

Pixel Count88, 129,
196

Shading Comp.

171

WB

83

All x

171

W Keep Warm Color

84

Color Space

105

FeatureFeaturegc K Utility

File Name

172

Backlit LCD

174

Edit Filename

172

Sleep

174

dpi Settings

172

Auto Power Off

174

Copyright Settings

172

Quick Sleep Mode

174

Lens Info Settings

196

Certification

174

Z Record/Erase

Feature Indexg

Y Record/Erased Setup Menu

Quick Erase

173

Card Setup

160

RAW+JPEG Erase

173

X

27

Priority Set

173

W

29

s

159

a EVF
EVF Auto Switch

173

Rec View

159

EVF Adjust

173

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

160

EVF Style197

Firmware159

V Info Settings

173

EVF Grid Settings

173

V Half Way Level

173

S-OVF

173

b K Utility
Pixel Mapping

223

Press-and-hold Time174

Level Adjust

174

Touchscreen Settings

174

Menu Recall

174

Fisheye Compensation

198

EN 13

Names of parts
Names of parts

1
2
3
4

0

5

d
e

l

f
g

m

6
7
8
9
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 34
2 Rear dial* (o)......................... P. 38 – 43, 113, 116, 189
3 Shutter button .................................P. 35
4 R (Movie)/H button ............P. 58/P. 119
5 F (Exposure compensation) button................................P. 38, 40, 42, 44, 64
6 Front dial* (r)........................... P. 38 – 43, 70, 113, 116
7 Lens attachment mark ....................P. 23
8 Preview button ..............................P. 108
9 Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)
0 Mode dial ........................................P. 34
a Stereo microphone ...............P. 122, 150
b ON/OFF lever ................................P. 26
c u (LV) button ...............................P. 32

a
b
c

h
i
j
k

n
o

d jY (Sequential shooting/Self-timer/
HDR) button ....................................P. 71
e Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator.............................................P. 71/P. 163
f Microphone jack coverg Remote cable terminal cover ........P. 219
h Connector coveri Strap eyelet.....................................P. 17
j Lens release button ........................P. 24
k Lens lock pin
l Microphone jack (A commerciallyavailable microphone can be connected.
ø3.5 stereo mini plug) ...................P. 151
m Remote cable terminal ..................P. 219
n HDMI connector (type D) ..............P. 191
o Micro-USB connector............P. 151, 208* In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.

14 EN

7
8
9
0
a
2
b
c
d
e
f
g

3
4
5
6

Names of parts

1

l
h
m

i
j
k
1 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 32
2 Monitor (Touch screen)......................P. 30, 32, 36, 77, 114, 123
3 Viewfinder ...............................P. 32, 197
4 Eye sensor
5 Eyecup ..........................................P. 219
6 MENU button ...............................P. 125
7 Hot shoe .................................P. 93, 215
8 AEL/AFL / 0 (Protect) button.....................................P. 70, 175/P. 118
9 Fn lever ...........................P. 37 – 43, 181
0 Speaker
a ISO button ..............................P. 70, 188b INFO button ...........................P. 33, 115c Q button ........................P. 77, 116, 125
d Arrow pad* ....................................P. 116
e q (Playback) button....................P. 116
f  (Erase) button ..........................P. 119
g CHARGE (battery charge) lamp....P. 20
h Connector cover ...........................P. 214
i Tripod socket
j Battery compartment cover.............P. 18
k Battery compartment lock ...............P. 18
l Card compartment cover ................P. 21
m Card slot .........................................P. 21* In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad.

EN 15

1 Preparation
1

Unpacking the box contents

Preparation

At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased thecamera.

CameraUSB cable
CB-USB12

Body cap *FlashFL-LM3

EP-15 eyecup *Hot shoe cover *Lithium-ion battery
BLS-50Lithium-ion charger
BCS-5• Warranty Card

Basic Manual* The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover attached to or inserted in the camera.

16 EN

Strap

Attaching the Strap

1

Before attaching the strap, remove the end
from the keeper loop and loosen the strap
as shown.

1

2

Pass the end of the strap through the strap eyelet and backthrough the keeper loop.

3

Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.

Preparation

Keeper loop

• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it firmly to ensure that it will not come loose.

EN 17

Charging and inserting the battery

11Charge the battery.
Charging
indicator

Charging indicator

Preparation

Charging inprogress

Lights orange

Charging
complete

Off

Charging error

Direction indicating
mark (C)3

Lithium ion battery

Blinks orange(Charging time: Approximately
3 hours 30 minutes)

AC wall outlet

1

Lithium ion
charger2

AC cable• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.
• Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected to an
optional USB-AC adapter. g “On-Board Charging Using an Optional USB-AC
Adapter (the F-5AC)” (P. 19)

2

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in
the OFF position.

ON/OFF lever

3

Open the battery compartment cover.

Battery compartment cover

2

1

Battery compartment lock

18 EN

4

Loading the battery.
• Use only BLS-50 batteries(P. 16, 245).

1
Preparation

Direction indicating mark5

Close the battery compartment cover.

$• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case thebattery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 210).

 Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push thebattery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and thenremove.
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while thememory card access indicator (P. 31) is displayed.

 On-Board Charging Using an Optional USB-AC Adapter (the F-5AC)• Read the documentation provided with the F-5AC before use.

1

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

EN 19

2

Confirm that the battery is inserted in the camera.

3

Connect the camera and USB-AC adapter via
USB.

1
Preparation• The CHARGE lamp light during charging. Charging
takes about 4 hours. The lamp goes out as thebatteries reach full charge.

4

Charging stops when the camera is turned on.

• The USB-AC adapter cannot be used to charge the batteries when the camera is on.
• If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable.
• USB charging is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.

%• The batteries will not charge while the camera is off if pictures are being uploaded to asmartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Automatically uploading images
while the camera is off” (P. 204)

$ The USB-AC Adapter• Be sure to unplug the USB-AC adapter for cleaning. Leaving the USB-AC adapter
plugged in during cleaning could result in injury or electric shock.

20 EN

Inserting the card
The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the SD(Secure Digital) standard. Read “Usable cards” (P. 211) before use.

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Open the card compartment cover.

1
Preparation

1

1

2

3

Slide the card in until it locks into place.
• Turn off the camera before loading or removing thecard.
• Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card.
Doing so may damage the card slot.

Terminal area

4

Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
• Be sure the card compartment cover is closed before
using the camera.

2
1• Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use (P. 160).

EN 21

 Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the memory
card access indicator (P. 31) is displayed.

1
Preparation
22 EN

Attaching a lens to the camera

1

Rear cap

Remove the rear cap of the lensand the body cap of the camera.

1

1

3

1
Preparation

2

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

2

Align the lens attachment mark (red) on thecamera with the alignment mark (red) on thelens, then insert the lens into the camera’s
body.

Lens attachment mark4

Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it click(direction indicated by arrow 3).

3• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.

EN 23

5

Remove the front lens cap.

1

1

1

Preparation

1
2
1

2

• Before attaching or removing lenses, confirm that the camera ON/OFF lever is in the
OFF position.

Removing Lenses

1

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens asshown.

Lens release button
2

1

Interchangeable lenses
Read “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 212).

24 EN

Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.

Preparation

Up to 90°
Up to 180°

1

Up to 270°

• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.

• The camera can be configured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)” (P. 190)

EN 25

Turning the camera on

1

1

Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.

Preparation

ON/OFF leverBattery level

MonitorBattery icon and battery level are displayed.
j (green): The camera is ready to shoot.
k (green): The battery is not full.
l (green): The battery is low.
m (blinks red): Charge the battery.

S-AF
ISO-A
200

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will besuspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, thecamera will turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings
for When the Camera Is Off” (P. 202)
• The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in
the G custom menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute andturn off automatically after four hours. g [Sleep] (P. 174), [Auto Power Off] (P. 174)

26 EN

Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the first time, perform the initial setup by choosing alanguage and setting the camera clock.

1

Press the Q button when the initial setup dialog isdisplaying prompting you to choose a language.

Please select your language.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.

2

CursorHighlight the desired language using the front orrear dial or the FGHI buttons on the arrow pad.
• The language-selection dialog has two pages of
options. Use the front or rear dial or the FGHI
buttons on the arrow pad to move the cursor between
pages.

1
Preparation• Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
• The file name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set thecorrect date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date
and time have not been set.

W
HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Indonesia

Italiano

Norsk

0DJ\DU

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)SetW
RomanianEspañolɊɭɫɫɤɢɣ

SrpskiSlovensky

6ORYHQãþLQD

SvenskaTürkçeɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ

Viet Nam

Setare3

Press the Q button when the desired language ishighlighted.

W
HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français• If you press the shutter button before pressing the Q
0DJ\DUǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
DeutschItalianoIndonesia
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and no
Latviski/LHWXYLǐN
language will be selected. You can perform the initial
Polski
Norsk
Português(Pt)setup by turning the camera off and then on again to
Setdisplay the initial setup dialog and repeating the processfrom Step 1.
• The language can be changed at any time from the d setup menu. g “What to Do
If You Can’t Read the Display” (P. 29)

EN 27

4

1
Preparation
28 EN

5

Set the date, time, and date format.
• Use the HI buttons on the arrow pad to highlightitems.
• Use the FG buttons on the arrow pad to change thehighlighted item.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the d setup
menu. g [X] (P. 159)

X

Y

2019

M

D

Time
Y/M/D

CancelThe time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.

Complete the initial setup.
• Press the Q button to set the clock.

• If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date andtime may be reset to the factory default setting.
• You may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g [nK](P. 149)

What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not haveselected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose anotherlanguage.

Press the MENU button to view themenus.

1ѯєьѬщѥҕ ѕѓѥё11іѨѯоѶ шѯјѪѠдѱўєчдѼѥўьчѯѠк
ѱўєчѓѥё
KKѝ Ѥчѝҕњьѓѥё
чѧлъѧ ѤјѯъѯјзѠь
j/Y/i

2

YF
4:3
юѧ ч

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

дј Ѥэ

Preparation

1

MENU button

2

Highlight the d (setup) tab using FG
on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.

ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
1

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч
Xдѥішкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
’19.12.01 12:30:00
Wѳъѕs
j±0 k±0чѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
0.5 њѧьѥъѨ
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ

2

дј Ѥэ

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

Arrow padQ button3

Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
1

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч
Xдѥішкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
’19.12.01 12:30:00
Wѳъѕs
j±0 k±0чѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
0.5 њѧьѥъѨ
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ

2

дј Ѥэ

4

Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the Q button.

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
W

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Indonesia

Italiano

Norsk

Back

0DJ\DU

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)

Set

EN 29

2

Shooting
Information displays while shooting

2

Monitor display during still photography

Shooting

123

45

890a

bcd

BKT HDR

W
28mm

T

W

ef ghi z

67
O

j

T

1

FP RC BKT

99

FLK

k

l

N

28mm

S-IS AUTO

o
p

UTO

WB
AUTO

q
r
s

B
TO

t
u
v

F

M
L
K
J

S-AF
ISO-A
200

-2.0

4:3

I

LF

+2

H

C AEL

G

P

-3

250 F5.6 +2.0

F E DC

B

Az

+7

4K

30p

1:02:03

0

y

mn

x

±0

X

S

P

w

Q

T

L
R

off

TC 00:00:00:04 DF

T

W
28mm

M-IS 1

WB
AUTO

C-AF
ISO
AUTO

U

P
4K

30p

n

1:02:03

W

30 EN

P

1023

Monitor display during movie mode

R

3

V

r Sequential shooting/Self-timer/
Anti-Shock shooting/Silent shooting/
Pro Capture shooting/High resolution shooting...........................................P. 71 – 76, 87
s Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
t Image quality (still images) .....P. 88, 129
u Record mode (movies) ...................P. 89
v Available recording time ...............P. 242
w Number of storable still pictures ...P. 241
x Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 106
y Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 97
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 64
z Level gauge ....................................P. 33
A Exposure compensation value........P. 64
B Aperture value ........................ P. 37 – 43
C Shutter speed ......................... P. 37 – 43
D Histogram .......................................P. 33
E Preview .........................................P. 108
F AE lock....................................P. 70, 175
G Shooting mode........................ P. 34 – 59
H Custom mode .........................P. 57, 128
I Touch operation ......................P. 36, 123
J Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
K ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
L AF mode .........................................P. 80
M Metering mode ................................P. 82
N Flash mode ...............................P. 93, 94
O Battery level ....................................P. 26
P Live guide recall ..............................P. 49
Q Flicker scan...................................P. 194

2
Shooting

1 Card write indicator ...................P. 19, 22
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................P. 200 – 207
3 Active Bluetooth® connection.............................................P. 200 – 207
4 Wireless LAN connection.....P. 200 – 207
5 Pro Capture active ..........................P. 74
6 Super FP flash ..............................P. 215
7 RC mode.......................................P. 216
8 Bracketing .....................................P. 132
9 HDR/Backlight HDR................P. 52, 137
0 Handheld starlight ...........................P. 51
a Multi focus shot ...............................P. 53
b Multiple exposure..........................P. 139
c D Keystone compensation .........P. 141
d Fisheye compensation ..................P. 198
S-OVF* ....................................P. 173ef Digital Tele-converter ....................P. 130
g Time lapse shooting......................P. 131
h Face priority/Eye priority .................P. 67
i Anti-flicker shooting ......................P. 185
j Zoom operation direction/Focal lengthk Internal temperature warning ........P. 228
l Flash(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)m AF confirmation mark......................P. 35
n Dust reduction...............................P. 223
o Image stabilizer...............................P. 86
p Picture mode...........................P. 98, 129
q White balance .................................P. 83* Shown in viewfinder only.
R Audio recording level * ....................P. 61
S Recording level meter ...................P. 150
T Movie sound .................................P. 150
U Silent shooting tab ..........................P. 61

V Movie (exposure) mode ................P. 147
W Movie effect ....................................P. 59
X Time code .....................................P. 146* Displayed only while audio recording level is being adjusted.

EN 31

Switching between displays
The camera is equipped with an eye sensor, which turns the viewfinder on when you
put your eye to the viewfinder. When you take your eye away, the sensor turns the
viewfinder off and turns the monitor on.
Put youreye to theviewfinder

2
Shooting

MonitorViewfinder
S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

S-AF

S-AF

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

LF

LF

4K

4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

030p

1:02:03

P

1023

Live view is displayed on the monitor.

0

1:02:03

1023

The viewfinder turns on automaticallywhen you bring it to your eye. Whenthe viewfinder is lit up, the monitor
turns off.

• If the viewfinder is not in focus, put your eye to theviewfinder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.
• Press the u button to switch between live view
and viewfinder shooting (live view and super control
panel display). If the super control panel (P. 77)
is displayed in the monitor, the viewfinder will turnon when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
• You can display the EVF Auto Switch setting menu
if you press and hold the u button. g [EVF
Auto Switch] (P. 173)

32 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

u button

Diopter adjustment dial

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.

2
S-IS AUTO

INFO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Image Only

Basic Information

INFO

S-IS AUTO

S-AF

INFO
S-IS AUTO

INFO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

P

Shooting

INFO button

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Level Gauge display(Custom2)

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Histogram display(Custom1)• You can change Custom1 and Custom2 settings. g [G/Info Settings] > [LV-Info](P. 166), [V Info Settings] (P. 173)
• The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still
photography mode. g Video Menu > [n Display Settings] (P. 146)
• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
Histogram display
A histogram showing the distribution ofbrightness in the image is displayed. The
horizontal axis gives the brightness, the verticalaxis the number of pixels of each brightness
in the image. Areas above the upper limit atshooting are displayed in red, those below thelower limit in blue, and those within the spot
metering range in green.

More
Less
Dark

BrightLevel gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you find it is no longer truly plumb or level. g [Level Adjust](P. 174)

EN 33

Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shootthe image.

Mode icon

2
Shooting

Indicator

 Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
P

Program AE (P. 37)

A

Aperture-priority AE (P. 39)

S

Shutter-priority AE (P. 41)

M

Manual exposure (P. 43)

B1

Bulb/time (P. 45)
Live composite (P. 47)

B

AUTO (P. 49)

SCN

Scene (P. 50)

ART

Art filter (P. 55)

C

Custom (P. 57)

nMovie (P. 59)

Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.

34 EN

2

Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fingers or thecamera strap do not obstruct thelens or AF illuminator.

2
3

Portrait position

Adjust the focus.
• Lightly press the shutter button down to the first position (press the shutter button
halfway).
The AF confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
Press the shutter
button halfway

AF confirmation markT

S-IS AUTO

W
28mm

S-IS AUTO

S-AF

S-AF

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

LF

LF

4K

4K

30p

P

Shooting

Landscape position

250 F5.6 0.0

030p

1:02:03

P

1023

250 F5.6 0.0

AF frame

0

1:02:031023

AF target• If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confirmation mark will flash (P. 224).
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. The area coveredby the AF target can be chosen in the AF-target selection display (P. 65). The AF
frame is not displayed when q (all targets) is chosen for AF-target mode.

4

Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.
• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.

• You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 36)

Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to thefirst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway”, that ofpressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down”.
Press halfway

Press the rest of
the way down

EN 35

Shooting with touch screen operations
Tap d to cycle through touch screen settings.

2
Shootingd Tap a subject to focus and automatically release
the shutter. This function is not available in moviemode.
U Touch screen operations are disabled.
V Tap to display an AF target and focus on thesubject in the selected area. You can use the touch
screen to choose the position and size of the focus
frame. Photographs can be taken by pressing the
shutter button.

S-AF
ISO-A
200

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

 Previewing the subject (V)1

Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target.

S-IS AUTO

14
S-AF

10
7
5

Off

3x

250 F5.6

2

Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.
• Use your finger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.

10x• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use• Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can disable the touch screen operation. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 174)

36 EN

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.

1

Rotate the mode dial to P.

2

3

Focus and check the display.

S-IS AUTO• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.

Shooting

2

S-AF
ISO-A
200

Take pictures.

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will flash as shown.
Display
Large aperture (low f/-number)/slow shutter speed

60" F2.8
Small aperture (high f/-number)/fast shutter speed

8000 F22

Problem/solution
The subject is too dark.
• Use a flash.
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density)
filter to reduce the amount of light entering thecamera.
• Take pictures in silent mode. g “Shooting without
shutter sound (Silent s)” (P. 74)• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)• The aperture value shown when the displays flash varies with the lens and focal length.

EN 37

 Adjusting Settings in Mode P
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Program shift• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

2
Shooting%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever canalso be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)

 Program ShiftWithout changing exposure, you can choose from different
combinations of aperture and shutter speed selected
automatically by the camera. This is known as program
shift.
• Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P
to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end program shift,rotate the rear dial in the opposite direction until Ps is nolonger displayed.

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

Ps

250 F5.6 0.0

0Program shift%• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of
exposure settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)

38 EN

1:02:031023

Choosing aperture(A: Aperture-Priority AE)

In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets
the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture
values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus(depth of field), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller apertures)increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of and behind thesubject.
Lower aperture values…

F4.0…reduce depth of field and increase
blur.

1

Rotate the mode dial to A.

2

Choose an aperture.

3

F5.6

F8.0

Take pictures.

F11…increase depth of field.

• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating therear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.

2
Shooting

F2.8

Higher aperture values…

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

A

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Aperture value

EN 39

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
flash as shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Slow shutter speed

260" F5.6

Shooting

Fast shutter speed

8000 F5.6

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limitsof the camera metering system have been exceeded. Use athird-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce the amount oflight entering the camera.
• Take pictures in silent mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silent s)” (P. 74)• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)

 Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Aperture• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever canalso be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of field.
g [K Button Function] (P. 108)

40 EN

Choosing shutter speed(S: Shutter-Priority AE)

In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperturefor optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear
to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects,
lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic effect.
Slower shutter speeds…
60”

15

Faster shutter speeds…
30

1

Rotate the mode dial to S.

2Choose a shutter speed.

125

250

2

8000

Shooting…produce dynamic shots with a senseof motion.

60…“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.

S-IS AUTO• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
S-AF
the rear dial.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
S
250 F5.6 0.0
s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter soundShutter speed(Silent s)” (P. 74)• The aperture selected automatically by the camera willappear in the display.
ISO-A
200

3

LF
4K

30p

0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.

EN 41

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will flash as
shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Low aperture value

22000 F2.8

Shooting

High aperture value

125 F22

Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.
Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as
1/32000 s are available in silent mode.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, thelimits of the camera metering system have been exceeded.
Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce theamount of light entering the camera.

• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)• The aperture value shown when the display flashes varies with the lens and focal length.

 Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever canalso be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker Reduction](P. 184), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194)

42 EN

Choosing aperture and shutter speed(M: Manual Exposure)In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of field.

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

2

3

Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

S-IS AUTO• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front
dial and shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available insilent mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound(Silent s)” (P. 74)• The display shows the difference between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• When [AUTO] is selected for [ISO], ISO sensitivity willautomatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the
selected exposure settings. [ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70, 80)

Shooting

2

S-AF
ISO
400

LF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 +2.0

0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for [ISO], theISO sensitivity display will flash as shown.
Display

Problem/solution

ISO-A
LOW

Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.

ISO-A
6400

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)”(P. 70, 80), [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169)

EN 43

 Adjusting Settings in Mode M
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed

2
Shooting%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever canalso be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker Reduction](P. 184), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194)
• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)

 Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for [ISO].
Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, apertureand shutter speed are not affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70,80), [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F
button. Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure difference
shown in the display.

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
400

LF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 +2.0

0

1:02:03

1023

Exposurecompensation
Exposure compensation plus
exposure difference

44 EN(B: Bulb/Time)Long Exposures

Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview thephoto in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved.
Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographing night scenes
or fireworks.

“Time” and “Live Time” Photography
The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end theexposure, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select bulb or time photography.

3• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.

S-AF
ISO
400

Press the MENU button.
• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which thepreview is updated.

2
Shooting“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.

LF
4K

30p

B

1:02:03

BULB F5.6

1023

Bulb or time photography

45Highlight an interval using FG on the arrow pad.

Live Bulb
Off

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

Display CountISO LOW ~ISO 400 ~ISO 800 ~ISO 1600• The menus will be displayed.
Back

6

24 times
19 times
14 times
9 times
Set

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If an option other than [Off] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or [LIVE TIME] will appear in thedisplay.

EN 45

7

Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using thefront dial.

S-AF
ISO
400

LF
4K

30p

B

2

BULB F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Aperture

Shooting

8

Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends
when the button is released.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start
the exposure and again to end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer] isreached. The default is [8 min]. The time can be changed. g [Bulb/Time Timer](P. 170)• [Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining until
the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise reduction
is performed (P. 169).

• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
• Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,image stabilizer, flash bracketing, multiple exposure*, etc.
* When an option other than [Off] is selected for [Live Bulb] or [Live Time] (P. 170)
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) turns off automatically.
• Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noiseor bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 169) is enabled.

%• Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. At default settings, thedisplay is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 170)
• During bulb/time photography, the brightness of the subject in the display is enhanced forease of viewing when lighting is poor. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• In mode B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress. This
allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure. g [Bulb/
Time Focusing] (P. 180)

46 EN

$ Noise
While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal
drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device
that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO
setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates thenoise reduction function. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169)

Lighten Blending(B: Live Composite Photography)

Shooting

Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by
fireworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select [LIVE COMP].

3

Press the MENU button.

2• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.

• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed.

B

LIVECOMP F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Live composite photography

4Highlight an exposure time using FG on the arrowpad.

Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

5

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.

6
7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

8

Press the shutter button all the way down to readythe camera.

Back

Set

Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.

• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready forcomposite shooting] is displayed.

S-AF
ISO
400

Ready for composite shooting

LF
4K

30p

B

LIVECOMP F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

EN 47

9

Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after eachexposure.

10 Press the shutter button again to end shooting.

2• Live composite photography can continue for up to three hours. The maximum
recording time available varies with battery level and shooting conditions.

Shooting• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, flash
bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, HDR photography, multiple exposure,keystone compensation, and fisheye correction.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) turns off automatically.

%• Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. At default settings,
the display is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 170)
• The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can bechosen in advance using the menus. g [Composite Settings] (P. 193)

48 EN

Letting the camera choose the settings(AUTO mode)

The camera adjusts settings to suit the scene; all you have to do is press the shutter
button.
Use live guides to easily adjust such parameters as color, brightness, and backgroundblurring.

1

Set the mode dial to B.

2

To adjust shooting settings, display the live guideby pressing the Q button.

2
Shooting• In auto mode, the camera automatically selects
the scene mode option appropriate to your subject
when you press the shutter button halfway. Once theselection has been made, the B icon in the bottom
left corner of the display will be replaced by the icon
for the chosen scene.
Change Color Saturation• Use FG to highlight an item in the live guide andpress Q to display a slider.

Guide item

3

Use FG to position the slider and choose alevel.

Clear & Vivid• Press the Q button to save changes.
• To exit, press the MENU button.
• When [Shooting Tips] is selected, use FG tohighlight the item and press the Q button to display
the detail.
• The effect of the selected level is visible in the display.
If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions] is selected,
the display will return to normal, but the selected
effect will be visible in the final photograph.

4

To set multiple live guides, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

5

Take pictures.

0Flat & Muted

SliderChange Color Saturation• A check is displayed on the guide item for live guides
that are already set.
• [Blur Background] and [Express Motions] cannot be
set at the same time.

• To clear the live guides from the display, press the MENU button.

• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
RAW+JPEG.
• Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy.
• Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels.

EN 49

• Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor.
• Frame rates drop the closer the [Express Motions] slider is to [Blurred Motion].
• The flash cannot be used when a live guide is set.
• Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may
result in pictures that are overexposed or underexposed.

$

2• Touch controls can also be used.

Shooting

Shooting in scene mode

(SCN mode)

The camera automatically optimizes settings for the subject or scene.

1

Rotate the mode dial to SCN.

2

Use FGHI to highlight a scene and press the
Q button.

PeopleNightscapes

MotionScenery

Indoors

50 EN

3

Use HI to highlight a scene mode and press the
Q button.

4

Take pictures.

Close-ups

Portrait• To choose a different scene, press the Q button. Next, press the MENU button to
return to the scene-selection display.

Types of scene modes
Subject type

Scene mode

Description

e e-Portrait

Smooths out skin tones and texture. The camera
records two pictures: one with the effect applied and
one without.

Portrait +DLandscapeSuitable for portraits featuring a landscape in the
background.
Blues, greens, and skin tones are captured beautifully.

Portrait +Nightscape

Suitable for portrait shooting against a background ofnight view.
Attach an external flash unit designed for use with thecamera (P. 93).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).

PeopleUm Children

Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.

G Nightscape

Suitable for tripod shooting of night scenes.
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).

U

Portrait +NightscapeNightscapes

2
Shooting

B Portrait

Suitable for portrait shooting.
Brings out skin texture.

Suitable for portrait shooting against a background ofnight view.
Attach an external flash unit designed for use with thecamera (P. 93).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).

Handheld
H
Starlight

Suitable for shooting night scenes without a tripod.
Reduces blur when shooting low light/illuminatedscenes.
The camera makes eight exposures and combinesthem into a single photograph.

X Fireworks

Suitable for shooting fireworks at night.
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).

EN 51

Subject type

Scene moded Light Trails

C SportSuitable for fast action shooting.
The camera will take photos while the shutter button ispressed.

m Children

Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.

J Panning

Choose to blur the background behind moving objects.
The camera chooses the optimal shutter speed forpanning shots based on camera motion.

F Landscape

Suitable for landscape shooting.

` Sunset

Suitable for shooting the sunset.

g Beach & Snow

Suitable for shooting at snow-capped mountains,seascapes in the sun, and other whitish scenes.

s Panorama

Take photos that can afterwards be joined on acomputer to create a panorama.
• For information on taking photos using this feature,see “Shooting a Panorama” (P. 54).

E Backlight HDR

Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter
button is pressed, the camera takes four shots andsubsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed
image.

2
Shooting

Nightscapes

MotionScenery

52 EN

Description
The camera automatically shoots multiple images,
takes newly bright areas only, and composites theminto a single image.
With normal long exposure, an image of light trace suchas star trails with bright buildings tends to get too bright.
You can capture them without over exposure while
checking the progress.
Press the shutter button to start shooting, then view thechanging result in the monitor and press the shutter
button again to end shooting once the desired result isachieved (maximum 3 hours).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
• Advanced settings can be accessed via live
composite photography (dark and light fieldcomposite) in B mode (P. 47).

Subject type

Close-ups

Description

W Candlelight

Suitable for shots of candlelit scenes. Warm colors arepreserved.

k Silent s

Disable camera sounds and lights in situations in which
they may be unwelcome (P. 74).

B Portrait

Suitable for portrait shooting.
Brings out skin texture.

e e-Portrait

Smooths out skin tones and texture.
The camera records two pictures: one with the effectapplied and one without.

m Children

Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.

E Backlight HDR

Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter
button is pressed, the camera takes four shots andsubsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed
image.

i MacroSuitable for close-ups.

j Nature Macro

Suitable for vivid close-ups of flowers or insects.

d Documents

Suitable for photos of timetables or other documents.
The camera heightens the contrast between the text
and background.

tMulti Focus
Shot

2
ShootingIndoors

Scene mode

The camera takes eight photos, varying the focus
distance with each shot.

• To maximize the benefits of the scene modes, some of the shooting function settings are
disabled.
• Some time may be needed to record pictures taken using [e-Portrait]. In addition, when
the image quality mode is [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• Movies cannot be recorded using [e-Portrait], [Handheld Starlight], [Panorama], or[Backlight HDR].
(high-speed movie• Movie recording is not available in [Light Trails] mode whenrecording) is selected for [nK].
• [Handheld Starlight] pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality will be recordedin RAW+JPEG format, with the first frame recorded as a RAW image and the final
composite as a JPEG image.
• [Backlight HDR] records HDR-processed images in JPEG format. When the image quality
mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• In [Panning], J is displayed during panning detection, and I is displayed when nothingis detected.
• When using a lens with an image stabilizer switch in [Panning], turn the image stabilizer
switch off.
Sufficient panning effects may not be obtained in bright conditions. Use a commerciallyavailable ND filter to obtain effects more easily.
• Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted while photographs are being taken in [Multi Focus
Shot] mode.
• No pictures can be taken in [Multi Focus Shot] mode when a Four-Thirds lens is attached.

EN 53

 Shooting a Panorama
Pictures taken using this option can be joined together to form a panorama. You willneed to install the latest version of Olympus Workspace on your computer to join
pictures together to form a panorama. g “Connecting the camera to a computer”(P. 208)2
Shooting

1

Highlight [Panorama] in the SCN mode menu (P. 51) and press the Q
button.

2
3

Use FGHI to choose a pan direction.
Take a picture, using the guides to frame the shot.
• Focus, exposure, and other settings are fixed at thevalues for the first shot.

ISO-A
200

250 F5.6

41023

Take the remaining images, framing each shot so that the guides overlap withthe previous picture.

ISO-A
200

250 F5.6

1023

[2]

Exit

[3]

Exit

• A panorama may include up to 10 images. A warning indicator (g) is displayed after
the tenth shot.
• During panorama shooting, the image previously taken for position alignment will not
be displayed. With the frames or other markers for display in the images as a guide,
set the composition such that the edges of the overlapping images overlap within theframes.

5

54 EN

After taking the last shot, press Q to end the series.

Using art filters(ART mode)

1
2
3

Rotate the mode dial to ART.

4

Take pictures.

Use HI to highlight a filter.
Press G, highlight an effect using HI, and press
the Q button.

2

ART
1
EffectOff

Shooting• Press the Q button to choose a different art filter. If
effects are displayed, press F.
• The effects available vary with the selected filter (Soft
Focus Effect, Pin Hole Effect, Frame Effect, White Edge
Effect, Star Light Effect, Color Filter, Monochrome Color,
Blur Effect, or Shade Effect).

Pop Art 1

 Types of art filters
Pop Art 1/2 *Creates an image that emphasizes the beauty of color.

Soft Focus

Creates an image that expresses a soft tone atmosphere.

Pale&Light Color 1/2 *Creates an image that expresses warm light by scattering
overall light and slightly overexposing the image.

Light Tone

Creates a high-quality image by softening both shadowsand highlights.

Grainy Film 1/2 *Creates an image that expresses the roughness of black
and white images.

Pin Hole 1/2/3 *Creates an image that looks as if it was taken using an oldor toy camera by dimming the image perimeter.

Diorama 1/2 *Creates a miniature-like image by emphasizing saturationand contrast, and blurring unfocused areas.

Cross Process 1/2 *Creates an image that expresses a surreal atmosphere.
Cross Process II creates an image that emphasizes
magenta.

Gentle Sepia

Creates a high-quality image by drawing out shadows andsoftening the overall image.

Dramatic Tone 1/2 *Creates an image that emphasizes the difference between
brightness and darkness by partially increasing contrast.

Key Line 1/2 *Creates an image that emphasizes edges and adds anillustrative style.

EN 55

2
Shooting

Watercolor 1/2 *Creates a soft, bright image by removing dark areas,
blending pale colors on a white canvas, and further
softening contours.

Vintage 1/2/3 *Expresses an everyday shot in a nostalgic, vintage tone
using printed film discoloration and fading.

Partial Color 1/2/3 *Impressively expresses a subject by extracting colors you
want to emphasize and keeping everything else monotone.

Bleach Bypass 1/2

The “bleach bypass” effect, which you may recognize frommotion pictures and the like, can be used to great effect inshots of streetscapes or metal objects.

Instant Film

A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typicalof film.

ART BKT (ART bracketing)

Records images using all art filter options with a single shot.
Press the INFO button on the selection screen to select afilter to record with.

* 2 and 3 are altered versions of the original (1).
• To maximize the benefits of the art filters, some of the shooting function settings are
disabled.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality (P. 88, 129), image quality willautomatically be set to RAW+JPEG. The art filter will be applied to the JPEG copy only.
• Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be lessnoticeable, or the image may become more “grainy”.
• Some effects may not be visible during movie recording.
• Playback may differ according to the filters, effects, or movie quality settings applied.

 Using [Partial Color]
Record only selected hues in color.

56 EN

1
2
3

Rotate the mode dial to ART.

4

Rotate the front or rear dial to select a color.

5

Take pictures.

Color

Select [Partial Color 1/2/3] in the art filter menu.
Highlight an effect and press the Q button.
• A color ring appears in the display.
• The effect is visible in the display.
• To choose a different color after shooting, rotate the front or rear dial to display thecolor ring.

Custom Mode

(C mode)Save settings as a Custom Mode (C mode) for instant recall.
• Custom settings can be saved by selecting [Custom Mode C] for [Reset / Custom
Modes] > [Assign to Custom Mode] (P. 128) in W Shooting Menu 1.
• Custom settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to C.
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

2
Shooting
EN 57

Recording Movies
Recording movies in photo shooting modes
The R button can be used for movie recording even when the mode dial is not in the
n position.

2

1

Press the R button to begin recording.

Shooting• Movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfinder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
R button2

Press the R button again to end recording.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.

• CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling
shutter” effect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion isa phenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
• If the size of the movie file being recorded exceeds 4 GB, the file will be split
automatically. (Depending on shooting conditions, movies under 4 GB in size may be split
into multiple files.)• When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
• A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a bit rate of [A-I](All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu
• If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device
will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a shorttime. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity
settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
During multiple exposure (still photography also ends.), while shutter button is pressedhalfway, during bulb/time photography, during sequential shooting, during time lapse
shooting, in B mode, during fisheye correction• When(high-speed movie recording) is selected for [nK], movies shot with
[i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], or an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in[Natural] mode.

58 EN

$
• Some settings, such as AF mode, can be set separately for movies and photographs.
g “Using the Video Menu” (P. 144)

Recording movies in movie mode (n)When the mode dial is rotated to n, movies can be recorded by pressing the shutter
button.

• A beep does not sound when the camera focuses in movie mode.

 Adding effects to a movie (Movie Effect)
You must first select [Movie Effect] on the screen that can be displayed by selecting theVideo Menu > [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings] > [Custom1] and pressing I(P. 146).

1
2

Rotate the mode dial to n.
Tap the on-screen icon of the effect you wish to use.
• Tap the display to add effects during shooting.
• Effects can be added by tapping the display before
starting recording.

W

Art Fade

Films with the selected picture mode effect. The fadeeffect is applied to the transition between scenes.

M

Old Film

Randomly applies damage and dust-like noise similar toold movies.

U

Multi Echo

Applies an after-image effect. After-images will appear
behind moving objects.

T

One Shot Echo

Applies an after-image for a short time after you tap theicon. The after-image will disappear automatically after awhile.

X

Movie Tele-converter

Zooms in on an area of the image without using the lenszoom. The selected position of the image can be zoomedin even while the camera is kept fixed.

3
42
Shooting

The effects available in P, S, A, and M modes can be applied to movies (P. 147).
You can also use movie effects such as after-images or zooming in on an area of theimage during recording.

Press the R button to start recording.
Press the R button again to end recording.
• The INFO button also controls the display of shooting information during movie
recording. Note, however, that pressing the INFO button during recording cancels all
movie effects except art fade and movie tele-converter.

EN 59

Art FadeTap the icon. The effect will be applied gradually when you tap the icon of a picture mode.
• Movies shot in partial color use the color selected in ART mode.
Old Film
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.

2

Multi Echo
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.

Shooting

One Shot Echo
Each tap of the icon adds the effect.
Movie Tele-converter
Tap the icon to zoom in on a selected area of the frame.

1

Tap the icon to display the zoom frame.
• You can change the position of the zoom frame bytapping the screen or using FGHI.
• Press and hold the Q button to return the zoom frame
to a central position.

L±0 R
TC 00:00:00:04 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO
AUTO

4K

30p

2

Tap M to zoom in on the area in the zoom frame.

3

Tap O or press the Q button to cancel the zoom frame and exit Movie
Tele-converter mode.

n

Off• Tap N to return to the zoom frame display.

• The 2 effects cannot be applied simultaneously.
• Some effects may not be available depending on the picture mode.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• The drive mode displayed in the movie mode is the setting for still image shooting. Still
image shooting is not available in the movie mode.
• Using art filter or movie effects may cause the frame rate to drop.
• Art filters cannot be used for high-speed recording or slow- or fast-motion movies.
• With the exception of the movie tele-converter, movie effects cannot be used in movieonly picture modes, for high-speed recording, or for slow- or fast-motion movies.
• Movie Tele-converter is not available when [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.

60 EN

1:02:03

Silencing Camera Sounds While Shooting Movies
You can prevent the camera from recording operating sounds that occur due to camera
operations while shooting.
Tap the silent shooting tab to display the function items. After tapping an item, tap thedisplayed arrows to select the settings.
Silent shooting tab
L±0 R
TC 00:00:00:04 DF

n

T

W
42mm

2

M-IS 1REC00:04
28:56

Shooting• Electronic zoom*, recording volume, aperture, shutter
speed, exposure compensation, ISO sensitivity* Only available with power zoom lenses• The options available vary with the shooting mode.

EN 61

Shooting Settings
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that canbe used for detailed adjustments.
DescriptiongDirect buttons

Adjust settings directly using buttons, including thoselisted below. Commonly-used functions are assigned to
buttons for quick access during viewfinder photography.
• The F, jY, and ISO buttons

63

LV super control panel/
super control panel

Choose from a list of settings showing current camera
status. You can also view current camera settings.

77

Live controls

Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display.

187

Menus

Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor.

125

Method2
Shooting
62 EN

Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred toas “direct buttons”. Included are the buttons listed below, which can be used for basic
shooting settings.

2
3

2
Shooting

1
4
5

7

6

8

Direct button
1 Preview button

Assigned function
Preview (P. 108)

2 AEL/AFL button

AEL/AFL (P. 70)

3 ISO button

ISO sensitivity (P. 70)

4 Arrow pad

N (AF-target selection) (P. 65)

5 jY button

Sequential/self-timer shooting (P. 71)

6 u (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewfinder) selection (P. 32)

7 F button

Exposure compensation (P. 64)

8 R button

Movie recording (P. 58)%• Buttons can be assigned different roles. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)

EN 63

Controlling exposure(Exposure Compensation)

The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic
intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make themdarker. Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, S, ART, and n. To enable
exposure compensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [ISO] (P. 70).

2
Shooting

Negative (–)

No compensation (0)Positive (+)• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV. The exposure bar in thedisplay shows values of up to ±3.0 EV. The bar flashes when a value outside this range isselected.
• The viewfinder and live view show the effects of values not exceeding ±3.0 EV.
• To preview the effects of exposure compensation in live view, select [Off] for [Live View
Boost] (P. 167) in G Custom Menu Q.
• During movie recording, exposure compensation can be adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
• The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie
recording.

 Access via the F (Exposure Compensation) Button
Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial. You canalso hold the F button and use the HI buttons on the
S-AFarrow pad.
• To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the Q
button.

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 +2.0

0

1:02:03

1023

Exposure Exposurecompensation bar%• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. Use the [K Button
Function] option (P. 107) in G Custom Menu M to choose the roles played by camera
controls during still photography and the [n Buttons/Dials/Levers] > [n Button Function](P. 145) option in the n movie menu to choose roles for movie recording.

 Access via the Dials
In modes P, A, and S, exposure compensation can be adjusted using the front dial.
Rotate the dial left or right. In mode M, hold the F button and rotate the front or rear
dial.

64 EN

Choosing an AF Target Mode

(AF Target Mode)

Choose the size and shape of the AF target. You can also select Face priority AF(P. 67).

1
2

Use FGHI to display the AF target.
Use the front dial during AF target selection to choose the target’s size andshape.

M

o

s

r

n

Shootingq2

M Single Target

Select a single focus target.

M

o Small Target

Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target
selection. Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.
o

N 5-Target Group

Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
nr 9-Target Group (3 × 3)

Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
r

EN 65

s 25-Target Group (5 × 5)

Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
s2

q All Targets (11 × 11)

Shooting

The camera chooses the target used for focus from all 121
targets.
q• The single target mode is automatically applied in movie shooting if the group target modeis set.

%• You can adjust AF target settings for [C-AF]. g [K C-AF Center Start] (P. 177) and[K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 178)
• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb], or [C-AF] is chosen for[K AF Mode] (P. 80), select [On2] for [AF Area Pointer](P. 162). The camera will display AF targets for all areasthat are in focus.

Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point)

The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You
can position the target over your subject.

1
2

Use FGHI to display the AF target.
Use the arrow pad to position the AF target during
AF target selection.
M

AF target• The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 130), [Image Aspect] (P. 87), and group target (P. 65) settings.
• Use the [N Custom Settings] (P. 162) in the custom menus to choose the roles of thedials and FGHI during AF target selection.

66 EN

Face priority AF/Eye priority AF
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects. When digital ESP metering is used, exposure will be weighted according to
the value metered for the face.

1
2

Use FGHI to display the AF target.

Selected option

Use the rear dial to select an option during AF
target selection.

2
Shootingq

I Face Priority On

The camera detects and focuses on faces.

N Face Priority Off

Face priority AF off.

K Face & Eye Priority On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eyeclosest to the camera.

L Face & R. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.
M Face & L. Eye Priority On

3

The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

Point the camera at your subject.
• If a face is detected, it will be indicated by a whiteframe.

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

4

5

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated bya green border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus
on an eye.
• A white border is also displayed if a face is detectedduring manual focus. Exposure will be set according
to the value metered for the center of the face.

1:02:03

0

T

W
28mm

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.

• Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
• When set to [p] (Digital ESP metering) (P. 82), metering is performed with priority
given to faces.
• Face priority is also available in [MF] (P. 80). Faces detected by the camera are
indicated by white frames.
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.

EN 67

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF(Super Spot AF)

You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing,zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than
the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.
• To use Super Spot AF, you must first assign [a] to a button with Button Function(P. 107).

2
S-IS AUTO

Shooting

S-AF

a

a

S-IS AUTO

S-AF

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

LF

LF

Off

4K

4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

0

Shooting display

1:02:03

1023

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Zoom frame AF display

10xaZoom AF displaya (Press and hold) / Q

1

Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is
assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.
• The frame is displayed in the same position as thetarget most recently used for autofocus.

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

P

2

LF

Off

250 F5.6 0.0

0

1023

Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• To re-center the frame, press and hold the Q button.

1:02:03

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF

Off

4K

30p

P

3

Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose thezoom ratio.
• Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons
or the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom
frame.
• Press the Q button to accept and exit.

68 EN

5x

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:031023

4Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.

5

10x

2

250 F5.6

Shooting• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill thedisplay.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• You can also scroll the display using the arrow pad(FGHI).
• In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you canpress the INFO button during zoom to choose apertureor shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the Q button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.

Exposure adjustment display
for modes M and B

Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.

%• Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations”(P. 36)• You can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or configure thecamera to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus. g [LV
Close Up Settings] (P. 167)

EN 69

Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)

Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photographdarker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let thecamera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.

1

Press the ISO button, and rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.

2
Shooting

AUTO

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions.
Use [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169) in G Custom Menu T to choose themaximum sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter speed atwhich auto sensitivity control takes effect.

LOW, 200–25600

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range.

Locking the exposure(AE Lock)

You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you wantto adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images
at the same exposure.
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL)” (P. 175)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.

70 EN

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to yoursubject.

1
2

Press the jY button.
Rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.
• Custom self-timer options can be viewed by pressing the INFO button.
oSingleT

The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. Focus, exposure, andwhite balance are locked at the values for the first shot in
Sequential Higheach series. You can choose the frame advance rate and the
maximum number of shots in each series (P. 165). The frame
advance rate drops at [ISO] settings over 8000.

Sequential Low

The camera takes photos at up to about 6 fps while the shutter
button is held all the way down. You can choose the frame
advance rate and the maximum number of shots in each series(P. 165). Focus and exposure conform to the options selected
for [K AF Mode] (P. 80) and [K AEL/AFL] (P. 175). If[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode], the camera
will focus before each shot. The frame advance rate drops at[ISO] settings over 8000.

X

Y 12sec

The shutter is released 12 s after the shutter button is pressed
all the way down. The self-timer lamp will light for about 10 s
and then start to flash about 2 s before the shutter is released.
The camera focuses when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

Z

Y 2secWhen the shutter button is pressed all the way down, theself-timer lamp will start to flash and a photo will be taken after
about 2 seconds. The camera focuses when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.

cCustom
Self-Timer

Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer delay and thenumber of shots taken when the timer expires (P. 73).

S

♦S
(sample Anti-Shock r
icon)

Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion. Available insingle-frame, sequential low, and self-timer modes (P. 73).

♥S
(sample Silent s
icon)

Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for shutter
speeds faster than 1/8000 s or in settings where the sound of
the shutter would be unwelcome. Available in single-frame,
sequential low, sequential high, and self-timer modes. In ♥T
mode, focus, exposure, and white balance are locked at thevalues for the first shot in each series. The flash sync speed is
1/50 s. At [ISO] settings over ISO 8000, the flash sync speed
drops to 1/20 s.

2
Shooting

Single-frame advance. The camera takes one photo each time
the shutter button is pressed all the way down.

EN 71

2
Shooting
72 EN

p

Pro CaptureHigh *q

Pro Capture
Low *

h

High Res Shot *Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The
camera starts recording pictures, including those captured while
the button was pressed halfway, when the button is pressed all
the way down (P. 74). In p mode, focus, exposure, and whitebalance are locked at the values metered when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
Take high-resolution photos (P. 76). Use a tripod.

* Art filter picture modes cannot be used.
• To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
• In S and q modes, the camera displays the view through the lens during shooting. In
T and p modes, it displays the shot immediately preceding the current frame.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and thefocus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• You can choose the items displayed using [j/Y Settings] in the custom menus(P. 166).
• Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject orcamera moves quickly during shooting.
• To use the flash in [Silent s] mode, select [Allow] for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silents Mode Settings] > [Flash Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2.

Self-Timer Options(c Custom Self-timer)

Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number of shots
taken when the timer expires.

1
2

Highlight c (custom self-timer) by rotating the frontor rear dial and press the INFO button.
Highlight items using HI on the arrow pad anduse FG to choose an option.

2

Settings o
Y1s

×3

0.5s

Off

Custom Self-timer

P

Number of Frames

Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.

Y Timer

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.

Interval Length

Choose the interval between the shots taken when the timer expires.

Every Frame AF

Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot.

Shooting

3

Press the jY button.

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations(Anti-Shock r)
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during
macro or telephoto photography.
You must first enable display of this option by selecting [j/Y Settings] (P. 166) in
G Custom Menu P and placing a check (v) next to the appropriate item.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the startof shooting can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Anti-Shock r] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 142).

1
2

Press the jY button.

3

Take pictures.

Select one of the items marked ♦ using the front or rear dial and press the Q
button.
• When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.

EN 73

(Silent s)

Shooting without shutter sound2

In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making asound. An electronic shutter is used to reduce the minuscule camera shake caused by
the motion of the mechanical shutter, much as is the case for anti-shock photography.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter
being released can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silent s] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 142).

Shooting

1
2

Press the jY button.

3

Take pictures.

Select one of the items marked ♥ using the front or rear dial and press the Q
button.
• When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No
shutter sound will be emitted.

• The desired results may not be achieved under flickering light sources such as fluorescentor LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
• The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.

Shooting without a release time lag(Pro Capture shooting)Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins. If
the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected numberof pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you might otherwise missdue to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag. Choose from [Pro Capture Low] and [Pro
Capture High].
Burst shooting
continues

Up to 14 frames

Shutter button pressedhalfway

Moment you
want

Shutter button pressed all
the way down

Shutter lag

74 ENPro Capture Low (q)The camera shoots at 10 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for[K AF Mode] (P. 80), the camera will focus before each shot. Choose this option if
you anticipate that the distance to the subject will change during shooting.
Pro Capture High (p)The camera shoots at up to 30 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF] when
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 80). Choose this option if the
distance to the subject is unlikely to change very much during shooting.

3

Press the jY button.
Select p (Pro Capture High) or q (Pro Capture Low) using the front or rear
dial and press the Q button.

Shooting

1
2

2

Take pictures.
Capture icon
• Capture starts when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. A capture icon ( ) will be displayed. If the
button is kept pressed halfway for over a minute,capture will end and the Z icon will clear from theS-AFdisplay. Press the shutter button halfway again toresume shooting.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving
pictures to the memory card.
P
250 F5.6 0.0• Shooting will continue while the shutter button ispressed all the way down, up to the number of shots
selected for [Frame Count Limiter].

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

0

1:02:03

1023• Selecting q (Pro Capture Low) restricts aperture to values between maximum apertureand f8.0.
• Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in q (Pro CaptureLow) mode.
• Flickering occurred by fluorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
• During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
• The slowest shutter speed is limited.
• [Max fps] (p/Pro Capture High only), [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter]
can be adjusted via the custom menus using the [jL Settings] and [jH Settings] [0]options (P. 182).

EN 75

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution

2(High Res Shot)

Shooting

Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a seriesof shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single highresolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would not be visible
even at high zoom ratios. Take steps to steady the camera, for example by mounting it
on a tripod.
Use the [High Res Shot] option (P. 143) in X Shooting Menu 2 to choose time
between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter being
released, as well as the time allocated for the flash to charge when a flash is used in
High Res Shot mode.
After setting high resolution shooting, you can select the image quality of the highresolution shooting using image quality mode (P. 88, 129).

1
2

Press the jY button.
Select h using the front or rear dial and press the Q button.
• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will flash if thecamera is not steady. The icon stops flashing when thecamera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the
LV super control panel.

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
h

ISO-A
200

IF
+RAW
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Camera readying for HighRes Shot (flashes)

3

Take pictures.
• The h will flash to warn that shots may be blurred by camera shake. Keep thecamera steady.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting iscomplete. A message will be displayed during this process.

• Choose from JPEG (IF or JF) and JPEG+RAW modes. When image quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before combining
it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can be played backusing the latest version of Olympus Workspace.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) is set to [S-IS Off].
• During RC flash photography, the maximum flash wait time is 4 s and the flash control
mode is fixed at MANUAL.
• High Res Shot is available in modes P, S, A, and M.
• The following cannot be used:interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing,fisheye correction, and HDR.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in[Natural] mode.
• Image quality may drop under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps.
• Definition may be lost in areas of the picture where objects moved during shooting.

76 EN

The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the LV super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”),
the super control panel when framing shots in the viewfinder.
• Pressing the u (LV) button during live view enables viewfinder photography anddisplays the LV super control panel in the monitor.

2u(LV button)
2019.12.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

LF

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

ISO-A
200

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

± 0.0
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

0

P

1023

Live view photography

sRGB
4K

F

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

01023

Shooting

S-IS AUTO

S-AF

Viewfinder photography (monitor
turns off while viewfinder is on)

LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)

To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the Q button during live
view.
S-IS AUTOQ

Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

S-AF
ISO-A
200

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

0

P

1023

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Super Control Panel (Viewfinder Photography)

When you frame subjects in the viewfinder, the super LV control panel will be displayedin the monitor at all times. Press the Q button to activate the cursor.
2019.12.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

F

250 F5.6 0.0±030p
1:02:03

1023

P

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4K

0

Natural
±0

S ±0

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Q

NormalF

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

EN 77

 Using the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel

1

CursorPress the Q button.
• If you press the button during live view, the LV supercontrol panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.

Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

2

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Shooting

2

Highlight an item using FGHI
on the arrow pad or by rotating therear dial.

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

KAF ModeISO
Auto• The selected setting will behighlighted.
• You can also highlight items bytapping them in the display.

3

Natural
±0

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

P

Rotate the front dial to change thehighlighted setting.

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

KAF Mode
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
PreMF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

P

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4

Normal

sRGB

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Press the shutter button halfway to accept current settings and exit the LV
super control panel.
• If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will vanish and setting will end.

Additional Options

Pressing the Q button in Step 2 displays options for the highlighted
setting. In some cases, additional options can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button.

INFO button

Q button
KImage Stabilizer
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
F

250 F5.6

S-IS AUTO

INFO

Focal Length osRGBS-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

S-IS AUTO

Q

Normal

9mm

4K

30p

0 0 0 9 . 0 mm

Auto I.S.
1:02:031023

P

OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3

Auto I.S.

P

OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3[K Image Stabilizer]• Touch controls can be used in place of the Q button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice
to display options.

78 EN Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
LV super control panel
1

Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

2
3
4

± 0.0

6

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Natural±0Normal
±0

f
g
h
i

4K

30p

250 F5.6
7

Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

S ±0

sRGB
F

c
d
e

1:02:03

1023

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

NormalsRGB
F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:031023

8 90 a b

1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 80
3 K AF mode ...................................P. 80
AF target .........................................P. 65
4 Flash mode .....................................P. 93
5 Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
6 Image stabilizer...............................P. 86
7 Sequential shooting/Self-timer ........P. 87
8 KK .............................................P. 88
9 Metering mode ................................P. 82
0 Face priority ....................................P. 67
a nK..............................................P. 89
b Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
c White balance .................................P. 83

2Shooting

5Super control paneld White balance compensation/
Color temperature ...........................P. 85
e Picture mode...................................P. 98
f Sharpness N................................P. 101
Contrast u ...................................P. 101
Saturation t ................................P. 101
Gradation z.................................P. 102
Color filter x ................................P. 103
Monochrome color y...................P. 104
Effect 3........................................P. 104
Color*1.............................................P. 56
Color/Vivid*2 ..................................P. 100
Effect*3 ............................................P. 98
g Color space...................................P. 105
h Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 106
i Button function assignment ..........P. 107*1 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
*2 Displayed when Color Creator is set.
*3 Displayed when an art filter is selected.

EN 79

Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)

You can set the ISO sensitivity.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70)

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [ISO].

ISO
Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Use the front dial to select an option.

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

Choosing a focus mode1023

(AF Mode)

You can select a focusing method (focus mode). You can choose separate focusing
methods for still photography mode and movie mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [AF Mode].

AF ModeKAF ModeISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

S-AF
(Single AF)

The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF
confirmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This mode issuitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects with limited
movement.

C-AF(Continuous AF)

The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains
pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF
confirmation mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds
when the focus is locked at the first time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of thepicture, the camera continues trying to focus.

MF(Manual focus)

This function allows you to manuallyfocus on any position by operating the
focus ring on the lens.

Near)

Focus ring

S-AFb
(Simultaneous use of
S-AF mode and MF
mode)

80 EN

After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF]
mode, you can turn the focus ring to fine-adjust focus manually.

PreMF(Preset MF)

The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point
when shooting.

• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
• AF-mode selection is not available if the lens MF clutch is set to the MF position and[Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 163) in Custom Menu.

2
Shooting

C-AFK(AF tracking)Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera thentracks and maintains focus on the current subject while the
shutter button is held in this position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer
track the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame
the subject again and press the shutter button halfway.
• Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red
even if the camera is tracking the subject.

Setting a focus position for PreMF

1
2
3

Select [Preset MF] for AF mode.

4

Press the Q button.

Press the Q button and then the INFO button.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.

• The PreMF function can be recalled by pressing the button to which [Preset MF] isassigned in [K Button Function]. Press the button again to return to the original AF.
• The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] in Custom
Menu (P. 163).

EN 81

Choosing how the camera measures brightness(Metering)

You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.

1

2

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

MeteringISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Metering].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.
P

Normal

sRGB
F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Shooting

Metering

p Digital ESP metering

B

Center weighted
averaging metering

C Spot metering

Meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimizes
exposure for the current scene or portrait subject (if an option
other than [OFF] is selected for [I Face Priority]). This modeis recommended for general use.
Provides the average metering between thesubject and the background lighting, placing
more weight on the subject at the center.
Meters a small area (about 2% of the frame) withthe camera pointed at the object you wish tometer. Exposure will be adjusted according to thebrightness at the metered point.

D

Spot metering(highlight)

Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.

E

Spot metering(shadow)

Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.

• The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g [N Spot Metering](P. 170)

82 EN

Adjusting color(WB (white balance))

White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can beselected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [WB].

WB

2

WB
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

Auto whitebalance

Preset whitebalance

AUTO

Natural±0Normal
±0

S ±0

± 0.0

• One-touch white balance and custom white balance
options can be viewed by pressing the Q button
followed by the INFO button.
WB mode

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Color
temperatureLight conditions—

Most normal scenes (scenes containing
objects that are white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in mostsituations.
• You can opt to preserve the colors seen
under incandescent lighting (P. 84).

55300 K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fireworks

N

7500 K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shadeO

6000 K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies

1

3000 K

Subjects under incandescent lighting
Subjects under fluorescent lighting>

4000 KU—

n5500 K

Shooting

1

Underwater photography
Light sources with the same color
temperature as flash lighting

Situations in which you want to set whitebalance for a specific subject
Color temperature
One-touch white P/Q/
• Color temperature is set to a value
set by one-touchbalancemetered from a white object under the
W/X
WB
lighting what will be used in the final
photograph (P. 84).
Custom whitebalance

CWB

2000 K – 14000 K

Situations in which you can identify theappropriate color temperature• Choose a color temperature.

EN 83

One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lightingthat will be used in the final photograph. This is useful when shooting a subject under naturallight, as well as under various light sources with different color temperatures.

1

After selecting [P], [Q], [W], or [X] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or4), press the Q button followed by the INFO button.

2

2

Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.

Shooting

3

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• Frame the paper so that it fills the display and no shadows fall it.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.
• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning thepower off does not erase the data.

W Keep Warm Color
If desired, auto white balance can be adjusted to preserve the warm colors seen underincandescent lighting. White balance would normally be adjusted to make white colors
appear white, but this feature can be used to preserve the ambiance created by incandescentlighting.

84 EN

1

After selecting [AUTO], press the Q button followed by the INFO button.

2

Highlight [On] using FGHI on the arrow pad and press the Q button.

• [W Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.

Making fine adjustments to white balance(WB Compensation)

Choose white balance compensation values to fine-tune auto white balance, preset
white balance, and one-touch white balance.

1
2
3
4

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.

5

Change the white balance compensation value
using the front dial.

Use FGHI to select [WB].

2

Use the front dial to select an option.
White balance compensation
Auto xISO
Auto• Pressing Q displays hue adjustment options.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

NormalsRGB
F

Shooting

Use FGHI to select the white balancecompensation.

4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

For compensation on the A axis (Red-Blue)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize red tones and in the – direction toemphasize blue tones.
For compensation on the G axis (Green-Magenta)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize green tones and in the – direction toemphasize magenta tones.
• White balance compensation can be applied to all white balance modes simultaneously.
g [All x] (P. 171)%
• To preview the effects of changes to white balance, press the R (movie) button. A sample
image captured at the selected white balance will be displayed.

EN 85

Reducing camera shake(Image Stabilizer)

You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low lightsituations or shooting with high magnification.
The image stabilizer starts when you press the shutter button halfway.

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer.

K Image Stabilizer
KImage Stabilizer
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

n Image Stabilizer

Still-I.S. Off

Image stabilization disabled. Select this option whenusing a tripod.

S-IS
AUTO

Auto I.S.

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
If panning motion is detected, the camera willautomatically suspend image stabilization on that
axis.

S-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.

S-IS2

Vertical Shake Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use
I.S.
when panning the camera horizontally.

S-IS3

Horizontal
Shake I.S.

S-IS OffStill
picture(S-IS)Movie(M-IS)

Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use
when panning the camera vertically.

M-IS Off

Movie-I.S. Off

Image stabilizer is off.

M-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

Electronic image stabilization combined with VCMcontrolled image sensor movement.

M-IS2

All Direction
Shake I.S.

VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.

• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very
slow shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.

%• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway. g [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 165)
• You can prioritize lens image stabilization. g [Lens I.S. Priority] (P. 165)

86 EN

Using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will needto specify the lens focal length.
• Set [Image Stabilizer], press the Q button, press the INFO button, then use FGHI toselect a focal length, and press the Q button.
• Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
• Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 127) >[Reset] (basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.

Shooting

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer.
g “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 71 – 76)

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

SingleISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select the sequential shooting/self-timer.
Use the front dial to select an option.

2

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

P

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Sequential shooting/self-timer

Setting the image aspect
Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3],
the camera offers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

AspectISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Aspect].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.
P

Normal

sRGB
F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Aspect• Image aspect can only be set for still images.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same sizeas the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the
aspect ratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images
are played back.

EN 87

Photo File and Image Size Options(KK)

You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for theapplication (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.).

1

2

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

KK
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [KK].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

Shooting

P

Normal

sRGB
4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

KK

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
• Choose from the following options. The image size/compression combinations
available can be selected in the menus. g G Custom Menu X > [K Set]
(P. 196)
OptionImage size

Compression ratio

File format

YSF

5184 × 3888

SuperFine (1/2.7)

JPG

YF

5184 × 3888

Fine (1/4)

JPG

YN

5184 × 3888

Normal (1/8)

JPG

XN

3200 × 2400

Normal (1/8)

JPG

RAW

5240 × 3192

Lossless compression

ORF

RAW+JPEG

RAW plus the JPEG option selected above• During the high resolution shooting (P. 76), you can select between IF, JF,
IF+RAW, and JF+RAW.
• Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to checkthe image quality setting before shooting.

$• RAW images consist of unprocessed image data to which settings such as exposurecompensation and white balance have yet to be applied. They serve as raw data forimages that will be processed after shooting. RAW image files:- Have the extension “.orf”- Cannot be viewed on other cameras- Can be viewed on computers using Olympus Workspace Digital Photo Managing
software- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 153) retouch option in
the camera menus

88 EN

Frame Size, Rate, and Compression(nK)

Choose the image quality options available for movie recording. When choosing an
option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you planning to process
it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The camera can store
multiple combinations of frame size, rate, and compression from which you can selectaccording to your goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed movie options are alsoavailable. g “Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)”(P. 92) and “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 91)

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

nK
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [nK].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-ISnNormal

sRGB
F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

Shooting

1

2

1:02:03nK

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
• To change movie record mode settings, press Q followed by the INFO button androtate the rear dial.

EN 89

The Movie Quality Icon

Changes to settings are reflected in the [nK] icon as shown below.
Frame size
FHD

Full HD *1

1920 × 1080

HD

HD *1

1280 × 720

2

4K

4K *1

3840 × 2160

C4K

4K Digital Cinema *1

4096 × 2160

Shooting

Compression/bit rate
A-I

All Intra *2

SF

Super Fine

F

Fine

N

Normal• Not available when [4K] or[C4K] is selected for [Movie
Resolution].

Frame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps

50p

50p: 50.00 fps

30p

30p: 29.97 fps

25p

25p: 25.00 fps

24p

24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)• [60p] and [50p] are notavailable when:- [FHD] is selected for[Movie Resolution] and[A-I] is selected for bitrate- [4K] or [C4K] is selected
for [Movie Resolution]• Selecting [C4K] for [Movie
Resolution] fixes [Frame Rate]at [24p].

Movie typen

Setting 1, 2, 3, or 4:
Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, andcompression for later use.

G

Custom:Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You canalso shoot fast- or slow-motion movies (P. 92).

—

High-speed movie g “Filming High-Speed Movies”(P. 91)*1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format. Individual movie files can be up to 4 GB
in size. Continuous shots can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
*2 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases
file size.
• Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
• Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
• Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspectratio of 17:9.

90 EN

Filming High-Speed Movies

Film at high frame rates. Movies are filmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps.
Stretching playback to double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is selected
as the playback frame rate) lets you view in slow motion movements that in real life
took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are reflected in the movie quality icon as shown.
FHD

Full HD (1920 × 1080)

Movie type
HS

High speed (120 fps)2
Shooting

Frame size

Playback frame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed

50p

50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed

30p

30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed

25p

25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed

24p

24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed

1

Select2

To edit current settings, press the INFO button in Step 1.

3

Choose the playback frame rate.

4

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option and exit.

(high-speed movie recording).

• To use current settings, press the Q button. The camera will exit the menu with thecurrent options selected.
• This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie options.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to highlight the desired playback frame rate.

• Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
• Sound is not recorded.
• The picture angle is slightly reduced.
• Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
• Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
• Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
• Individual movies can be up to 4 GB in size.
• High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
• [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
• Movie effects cannot be used.
• [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art filter picture modes are not available.
• [Gradation] is fixed at [Gradation Normal].
• High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera
is connected to a smartphone.

EN 91

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)
You can create slow motion or fast-motion movies. You can set the recording speed
using nc in record mode.

2
Shooting

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].
Use the front dial to select 24 (custom recordmode) (P. 90), then press the Q button.
C4K• The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] can bechanged by pressing the INFO button. In HI, select[Slow or Fast Motion] and then press FG to select amagnification factor and press the Q button. Increase
the multiplication factor to shoot a fast-motion movie.
Reduce the multiplication factor to shoot a slow motion
movie. The frame rate changes accordingly.

4

nK
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-ISnNormalsRGB
F

250 F5.6

C4K

24p
1:02:03

Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.
• The movie will be played back at a fixed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion
or fast-motion.

• Sound will not be recorded.
• Any picture mode art filters will be canceled.
• Either or both of slow motion and fast-motion cannot be set for some options of [nK].
• Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available
varies with the option selected for [Frame Rate].

92 EN

Using a flash(Flash photography)

When using a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose the flash
mode using camera controls and take pictures with the flash.
 Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external flash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the
FL-LM3.

1

Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the flash.
• Slide the flash in until the foot clicks into place at theback of the shoe.

2
Shooting• Confirm that both the camera and flash unit are off. Attaching or removing a flash unit
while either the camera or flash unit is on could damage the equipment.

Hot shoe cover2

Position the flash head for bounce-flash
photography or direct lighting.
• The flash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that flash output may be insufficient for correct
exposure when bounce flash lighting is used.

3

Rotate the flash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the flash is
not in use.

ON/OFF lever

EN 93

 Removing Flash Units

1

Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide theflash unit from the hot shoe.
22

1

Shooting

UNLOCK button

Choosing a Flash Mode

(Flash Mode)

When taking pictures with a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can selecta flash mode using camera controls. Turning an attached flash unit on automaticallylimits the fastest available shutter speed.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Flash Mode
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Flash Mode].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Flash mode3

Use the front dial to select an option.

Flash mode

• Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control
panel.

Flash Mode
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

#ManualNatural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

#FULL

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

Flash output

94 EN

1:02:031023

 Flash Modes
Fill In

Enable the flash.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected
for [#Slow Limit] (P. 170) and [#X-Sync.] (P. 170) in
G Custom Menu W.

$

Flash Off

Disable the flash.
• The flash will not fire even if the unit is on.

0

RedeyeReduce “red-eye” in portrait photos. In other respects, the flash
functions as it does in # (fill in) mode.

2

Slow(slow frontcurtain sync)

Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
• Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value meteredby the camera and is not restricted by the option selected for[#Slow Limit].

1

Red-EyeSlow

2 (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The flash is
timed using front-curtain sync.

M

Slow2
(slow rearcurtain sync)

As for 2 (slow sync).
• The flash fires immediately before the shutter
closes. Moving objects appear to leave trailsof light behind them.

2
Shooting#

3, 4, Manual Value The flash fires at the selected level.
etc.

• Super FP high-speed sync must be configured using flash controls.
• In [0] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter is released approximately one second after
the first red-eye reduction flash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
• [0] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.

EN 95

 Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the flash mode. The range ofavailable speeds can be further restricted using the options in the G custom menu.
g [#X-Sync.] (P. 195), [#Slow Limit] (P. 195)

2

Exposuremode

Shooting

P/A

S/M

B*

LV supercontrol panel

Flash mode#

Fill flash

0Red-eye$Flash off1Red-eye slow

2

Slow front-curtain sync

M

Slow rear-curtain sync#

Fill flash

0Red-eyeFlash timing

Shutter speed

Front-curtain sync

30 – 1/250 s——

Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s

Rear-curtain sync
Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s$

Flash off——

M

Slow rear-curtain sync

Rear-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s

Front-curtain sync—#

Fill flash

0Red-eye$Flash off——

M

Slow rear-curtain sync

Rear-curtain sync—

* Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] is selected (P. 47).
• The fastest shutter speed available when the flash fires is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds inpictures taken with the flash may be overexposed.
• The flash sync speed for silent modes (P. 74), High Res Shot (P. 76), and focus
bracketing (P. 134) is 1/50 s. Setting [ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 when using an
option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus bracketing)sets the flash sync speed to 1/20 s. The flash sync speed is also set to 1/20 s during ISO
bracketing (P. 133).
• Even the minimum available flash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [ISO].

96 EN

Adjusting flash output(Flash intensity control)

Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject is overexposed, or isunderexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than [#Manual] (manual).
• When [#Manual] is selected, you can adjust flash output by pressing G to select[#FULL] and then rotating the front dial.

1

2

x
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [x].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural±0Normal
±0

S ±0

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.
PF

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Shooting

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

x• Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made withthe camera.

EN 97

Processing options

2(Picture Mode)

Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and otherproperties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic
intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately for eachmode. You can also add artistic effects using art filters. Art filters give you the optionof added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored
separately for each picture mode and art filter.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Shooting

 Picture mode options
A i-Enhance

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results
according to the type of subject (P. 104).

B Vivid

Choose for vivid colors.

C Natural

Choose for natural colors.

D MutedChoose for pictures that will later be retouched.

E Portrait

Enhance skin tones.

J Monochrome

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color filter effects
and choose a tint (P. 104).

K Custom

Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a
selected picture mode.

v e-Portrait

Smooth complexions.

F Underwater

Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
• We recommend choosing [Off] for [#+WB] (P. 170) when thisoption is selected.

c Color Creator

Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (P. 100).

e Pop Artf Soft Focus
g Pale&Light Colorh Light Tone
i Grainy Filmj Pin Holek Dioramal Cross Process
m Gentle Sepia
n Dramatic Toneo Key Linep Watercolorq Vintager Partial Colorv Bleach Bypass
9 Instant Film

98 EN

Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.

• Art filters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
• Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in othercases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.

%• You can hide or reveal picture modes using [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 166) in thecustom menus.

2

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].

2

Picture Mode
Picture Mode
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

3

Use the front dial to select an option.

NormalShooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Picture Mode

• Depending on the option selected, picture modeparameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 101 – 104).

ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

i-Enhance
±0

S ±0

±0

NormalStandard

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Changes depending on
mode selected

EN 99

Adjusting overall color(Color Creator)

The overall color of the image can be adjusted using any combination of 30 hues and8 saturation levels.

2

Picture Mode

Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].

ISO
Auto

Rotate the front dial to highlight [Color Creator].

± 0.0

Picture Mode

• A [c Color/Vivid] item will appear in the LV super control
panel.

4Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG and press the
Q button.

5

Adjust saturation and hue.

Color Creatorc Color/VividsRGBS-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• To restore default values, press and hold the Q button.

1023

c Color/Vivid

Color

ViVid±06

Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality(P. 88, 129).
• Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 137) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 139) are recorded at the[Natural] setting.
• [Color Creator] can be assigned to a camera control. It can be accessed via the button towhich [Multi Function] is assigned (P. 113).

100 ENMaking fine adjustments to sharpness(Sharpness)

Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Sharpness].

Sharpness
SharpnessISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

Making fine adjustments to contrast

1023(Contrast)2
Shooting± 0.0

Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the difference between bright anddark areas for a harder, more well-defined picture. Settings are stored separately foreach picture mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Contrast].

Contrast
Contrast
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

Normal

sRGB
4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

Making fine adjustments to saturation

1023(Saturation)

Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings are
stored separately for each picture mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Saturation].

Saturation
Saturation
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

NormalsRGB
F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:031023

EN 101

Making fine adjustments to tone

(Gradation)

Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by, forexample, brightening the entire picture. Settings are stored separately for each picturemode.

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Gradation].

Gradation
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:031023

z Auto(Shadow Adj)

Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is effective for images with areasof large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or theblacks appear too dark.

z Normal(Gradation Normal)

Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.

z HighUses a tone suitable for a bright subject.
(Gradation High Key)z Low(Gradation Low Key)

102 EN

Gradation

Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.

Applying filter effects to monochrome pictures(Color Filter)

Color filter effects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 98). Depending on the color of the subject, color filter effects can make subjects
brighter or enhance contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.

2

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Color Filter

Use FGHI to select [Color Filter].
Color Filter
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Monochrome
±0

S ±0
F N

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

5

F

250 F5.6

Shooting

12
3
4

Normal
T N
sRGB

4K

30p
1:02:031023

Select an item using the front dial.

N:NoneNo filter effect.

Ye:Yellow

Reproduces clearly defined white cloud with natural blue sky.

Or:Orange

Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.

R:Red

Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.

G:GreenAdds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green filter also emphasizes
the reds in lipstick.

EN 103

Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image(Monochrome Color)

Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 98).

2

1
2
3
4

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Monochrome Color

Use FGHI to select [Monochrome Color].

Shooting

Monochrome Color
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Monochrome
±0

S ±0

Normal
T N
sRGB

F N

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

5

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Use the front dial to select an option.

N:NormalCreates a normal black and white image.

S:Sepia

Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.

B:BlueShoot in blue-tinted monochrome.

P:Purple

Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.

G:GreenShoot in green-tinted monochrome.

Adjusting i-Enhance effects(Effect)

Choose the strength of the i-Enhance effect when [i-Enhance] is selected for picturemode (P. 98).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Effect].

EffectEffectISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

i-Finish
±0

S ±0

±0

NormalStandard

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

104 EN

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

F

4K

30p

250 F5.6

3Low (Effect: Low)

Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.

3Standard(Effect: Standard)

Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to images.

3High (Effect: High)

Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.

1:02:031023

Setting the color reproduction format(Color Space)

You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the[Color Space] (P. 171) in Custom Menu.

1

Color Space
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Color Space].

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.
P

Normal2sRGB
F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Color SpacesRGB

The established color space standard for Windows systems. It is widely
supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer
applications. This setting is recommended in most circumstances.

AdobeRGB

A color space standard defined by Adobe Systems Inc. It can reproduce
a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color reproduction isavailable only with software and devices (displays, printers, and the like)that support this standard. An underscore (“_”) appears at the beginningof the file name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).

Shooting

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

• [AdobeRGB] is not available in AUTO (B, P. 49), SCN (P. 50), ART (P. 55),
HDR, or movie (n) mode.

EN 105

Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain greater
control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone. You canselectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.

2

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Highlight&Shadow Control
Natural
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
S ±0
±0
G±0
NormalS-AF±0

Shooting

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Highlight&Shadow Control

2

Use FGHI to select [Highlight&Shadow Control], then press the Q
button.

3

Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.

HighLight±0• The tone range changes each time the button ispressed.
Shadow±0

MidtoneSelected tone range

45

106 EN

Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the Q button to restore the default
curve.

HighLight+5

Shadow±0

MidtonePress the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

ResetAssigning functions to buttons(Button Function)

Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [K Button Function] take effect only during still
photography. The functions assigned using [n Button Function] take effect inn (movie) mode (P. 145).
 Customizable Controls
ButtonDefault

Defaultz (Still picture),a (Movie)

2

K ButtonFunctionISOz Function

F ButtonFunction

F (Exposurecompensation)

R Function

R REC

AF Area Select (Stilld Function *1*2 picture), Direct Function(Movie)t Function

AEL/AFLjY Button
Functionj/Y (Still picture),
Off (Movie)u Functionu

D Function *3# (Still picture),
Electronic Zoom *5(Movie)E Function *3

j/Y (Still picture),
WB (Movie)l Function *4

AF Stop

Shooting

Button*1 The [Direct Function] option for d button applies to each of FGHI.
*2 Assign N to the d button to use it for AF target selection.
*3 To use [D Function] and [E Function] options, you will first have to select [Direct
Function] for [d Function].
*4 The l button can be used for the functions available on some lenses.
*5 Only available with power zoom lenses.

To change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Button Function
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Button Function], thenpress the Q button.
• [K Button Function] of Custom Menu (P. 164)
is displayed in still image shooting mode, and [nButton Function] of [n Button/Dial/Lever] (P. 145) isdisplayed in movie mode.

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS AUTO
M-IS

P

NormalsRGB
F

250 F5.6

4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Button Function

3

Highlight the desired control using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight a function using the FG buttons and press the Q button to assign
it to the selected control.

• The options available vary from button to button.

EN 107 Available Roles
Role

Function

AF Stop

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens l buttons.

2

AEL/AFL (t)Lock focus and/or exposure. When used for exposure lock, thecontrol locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock whenpressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selectedusing [K AEL/AFL] in G Custom Menu J (P. 175).

Shooting

RREC (movie
recording)

The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.

Direct Function(n)Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The
following roles can be assigned:
H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: # (flash)G button: j/Y (drive mode)• Use [D Function] and [E Function] to assign roles respectively to
the I and G buttons.

Preview (z)Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
depth of field. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using[z Settings] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 167).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

k (one-touch
white balance)

Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 84). Frame areference object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display,then press and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of
one-touch white balance options will be displayed, from which you
can choose the location to which the new value will be saved.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

AF Area Select(N)

Adjust AF-target settings.
You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 65) and position (P. 66)
and adjust settings for face/eye priority AF (P. 67). Press thecontrol to view the AF-target selection display. Use the front or rear
dial to choose AF-target mode and face/eye priority AF settings andthe arrow pad to position the AF target.

N Home(AF home position)(NH)

Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AFTarget Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall
saved settings and press it again to restore the settings previouslyin effect. Home position settings are saved using [N Set Home] in
G Custom Menu K (P. 179).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

108 ENFunction

MF (AF/MF toggle)

Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected byholding the button and rotating a dial. This option has no effect when[mode2] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function].

RAW K(RAW quality)

Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KK] settings. Press thecontrol to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting byholding the button and rotating a dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Test Picture(K TEST)

Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will
not be saved to the memory card.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

I/H(Underwater wide/
Underwater macro)

Press the button to switch between I and H. Press and hold the
button to return to the original shooting mode. When using a lens with
an electronic zoom, switching between I and H is automatically
set to the wide-angle setting and the telephoto setting.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Exposure F (F)Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with theshooting mode:[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M]: Use the rear dial or FG on the arrow pad for shutter speed.
Use the front dial or the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG on the arrow pad to switch between bulb/
time and live composite photography. Use the front dial or HI
buttons to choose the aperture.

Digital Teleconverter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 130). Press once to zoom
in and again to zoom out.

Keystone Comp.
(D)

Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 141).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

2
Shooting

Role

EN 109Role

FunctionFisheye
Compensation(A)

Enable fisheye correction (P. 198). Press once to enable fisheye
correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate thefront or rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

2

Magnify (a)Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoomin (P. 68). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide thezoom frame, press and hold the control. Use the touch controls or thearrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

Shooting

HDR

Enable HDR (P. 137). Press once to enable HDR. Press again todisable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

BKT

Enable bracketing (P. 132). Press once to enable bracketing. Pressagain to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial toadjust [Bracketing] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

ISO

Adjust [ISO] settings (P. 70). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on thearrow pad to adjust settings.

WB (white balance)

Adjust [WB] settings (P. 83). Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on thearrow pad to adjust settings.

Multi Function *Configure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 113).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose thefunction performed. The selected function can be performed bypressing the control.

Peaking

Toggle focus peaking on or off (P. 180). Press the control once toturn peaking on and again to turn it off. When peaking is on, peaking
options (color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button.

* The multi-function button can be assigned the following roles:b (Highlight&Shadow Control), c (Color Creator), J (ISO), I (WB), a (Magnify),d (Image Aspect), n (S-OVF), 2 (Peaking)

110 ENRole

Functionu View
Selection(display selection)

Switch between viewfinder photography and live view. If [Off] isselected for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 173), the display will switch
between the viewfinder and the monitor. Press and hold the control todisplay [EVF Auto Switch] options.

S-OVF (n)Enable [S-OVF] (P. 173). Press once to turn OVF simulation on.
Press again to turn it off.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

AF Limiter

Enable the AF limiter (P. 163). Press once to enable [AF Limiter].
Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear
dial to choose from three stored settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

2
Shooting

V Level Disp

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewfinder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for[EVF Style] (P. 197) in G Custom Menu a.

Toggle [K AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or off (P. 80). Press thecontrol once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous
focus mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [K AF Mode] by
Preset MF (PreMF)
holding the control and rotating a dial. Focus-mode selection using
custom controls is not available when [mode2] is chosen for [K Fn
Lever Function] (P. 164).
Lens Info Settings(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 196). Recall saved data for thecurrent lens after changing lenses or the like.

IS ModeToggle [Image Stabilizer] on or off (P. 86). Press once to select[Off] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control androtate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.

Flicker Scan(P)

Adjust settings for [Flicker Scan] (P. 148, 194). Press the control
to select [On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while
viewing banding in the display. Press the control again to display
shooting information and access other settings. Press and hold thecontrol to select [Off] for [Flicker Scann].

Flash Mode (#)

Adjust flash settings (P. 95). Press once to display flash options
and again select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings
using the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d Function] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

EN 111

Role

2
Shooting
112 EN

Functionj/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 71).
Press the button to display drive mode options and then choose amode using the front or rear dial or the HI buttons on the arrowpad.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

G Lock (touch
control lock)

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d Function] to [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use thearrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom
in and G or H to zoom out.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d Function] to [Direct Function].

Movie H (H)Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 59). Press thecontrol once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Pressthe control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press
and hold the control. Use touch controls or the arrow pad (FGHI)
to position the zoom frame.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.

S-AF

Focus using [S-AF]. Press the control to focus. Focus will lock while
the control is pressed.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.

OffThe control is not used.

 Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.
• To use the multi function feature, you must first assign [Multi Function] to a camera control(P. 107).
Choosing a function

1

Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.

2
Highlight&Shadow Control

P

2
3

ISO

WB

Press the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned.

Shooting• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.

Adjust settings.
Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO
Highlight&Shadow
button to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or midControl
tones).
Color CreatorISO
WB

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust
saturation.
Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

Magnify

The zoom frame will be displayed.

Image Aspect

Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

S-OVF
Peaking

Press the button to turn the feature on or off.

• You can choose the options displayed. g [Multi Function Settings] (P. 166)

EN 1133 Playback
Information display during playback
Playback image information

3

Simplified display

1

2

3

4

5 6 78Playback

×10

L F 100-0015

4:3

e

48kHz

2019.12.01 12:30:00

15

9
0

d c b aHDR1Overall display

f

g

h

i j
×10

48kHz

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

A+4
ISO 400

G+4
sRGB

WB
AUTO

Natural5184×3888
4:3

2019.12.01 12:30:00

w

114 ENvuts

1/8

L F 100-0015

15

r

k
l
m
n
o
p
q

g AF area pointer ...............................P. 65
h Shooting mode......................... P. 34–59
i Shutter speed .......................... P. 37–43
j Exposure compensation .................P. 64
k Aperture value ......................... P. 37–43
l Focal lengthm Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
n White balance compensation..........P. 85
o Color space...................................P. 105
p Picture mode...........................P. 98, 129
q Compression rate .........................P. 196
r Pixel count ....................................P. 196
s ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
t White balance .................................P. 83
u Focus adjustment .........................P. 163
v Metering mode ................................P. 82
w Histogram

3
Playback

1 Battery level ....................................P. 26
2 Wireless LAN connection......P. 200–207
3 Including GPS information ............P. 205
4 Print order
Number of prints ...........................P. 120
5 Sound record ................................P. 122
6 Share order ...................................P. 119
7 Protect ..........................................P. 118
8 Image selected .............................P. 119
9 File number ...................................P. 172
0 Frame numbera Image quality ..........................P. 88, 129b Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
c Focus stacking ..............................P. 134
d HDR image ...................................P. 137
e Date and time .................................P. 27
f Aspect border .................................P. 87

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback by pressing
the INFO button.

INFO button
×10

INFO

4:3

48kHz

L F 100-0015

2019.12.01 12:30:00

15

INFO

Simplified display
×10

48kHz

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

WB
AUTO

A+4
ISO 400

G+4sRGB
Natural

INFO

5184×3888
4:3

Image only

1/8

L F 100-0015

2019.12.01 12:30:00

15

Overall display• You can add histogram, highlight & shadow, and Light Box to the information displayed
during playback. g [q Info] (P. 188)

EN 115

Viewing photographs and movies

1

3

Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial (r) or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
Displaysthe previous frame

Displays
the next frame

Playback

Front dial
L F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

Still image
48kHz

Arrow pad

P
4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.12.01 12:30:00

q button

4

Movie

Rear dial (o)Zoom in (p)/Index (q)Front dial (r)Previous (t)/Next (s)Operation also available during close-up playback.

Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume(FG)
Close-up playback: Changing the close-up position
You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H)Arrow pad (FGHI)
during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button.
Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight image

116 ENINFO button

View image info

H (R) button

Select picture (P. 119)0 (AEL/AFL)
buttonProtect picture (P. 118)

 button

Delete picture (P. 119)

Q button

View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to singleframe playback)Finding Pictures Quickly(Index and Calendar Playback)• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.

q
L F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

Single-frame
playbackpq2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

Index display

p

2019.12
Sun

Wed

Thu

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

Mon

2

Tue

3

4

5

Fri

6

Sat

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

1

2

31

Calendar display• You can change the number of frames for index display. g [G Settings] (P. 189)

Zooming In(Playback Zoom)

Playback

Q

3

In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return tosingle-frame playback.

p

L F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

14x

2x

20

Single-frame
playbackpqq

2× zoom

14× zoom

Close-up playback

Rotating Pictures(Rotate)Choose whether to rotate photographs.

1
2
3Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; theimage rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.

%• The camera can be configured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g q playback menu > [R] (P. 153)
[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [R].

EN 117

Watching movies

3

Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Play Movie] and press the Q
button to begin playback. Fast-forward and rewind using
H/I. Press the Q button again to pause playback. While
playback is paused, use F to view the first frame and G
to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial (r) toview previous or next frame. Press the MENU button to
end playback.

Movie
Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order
0
Erase

Back

Set

Playback

Viewing Movies over 4 GB in SizeLong movies may exceed 4 GB in size. Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
files. The files can be played back as a single movie.

1

Press the q button.

2

Display a long movie you want to view and press the Q button.

• The most recent picture will be displayed.
• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through[Play Movie]:
Plays back files separately
Deletes all parts of a split movie[Delete entire n]:[Erase]:Deletes files separately• We recommend using the latest version of Olympus Workspace to play back movies on acomputer (P. 209). Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera to
the computer.

Protecting Pictures(0)0 (protect) icon

Protect images from accidental deletion. Display theimage you want to protect and press the 0 (AEL/AFL)
button to add 0 to the image (protection icon). Press the
0 (AEL/AFL) button again to cancel protection. You
can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting
Multiple Pictures (0, Erase Selected, Share Order
Selected)” (P. 119)• Formatting the card erases all data including protected
images.

118 ENL F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

Deleting Pictures(Erase)Display an image you want to delete andpress the  button. Select [Yes] and press
the Q button.
You can erase images without theconfirmation step by changing the button
settings. g [Quick Erase] (P. 173)

Erase

Yes
No
Back

Set

 button

Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order)

Playback

You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance. When playing
back images you want to transfer, press the Q button to display the playback menu.
After selecting [Share Order] and pressing the Q button, press F or G to set a shareorder on an image and display h. To cancel a share order, press F or G.
You can select images you want to transfer in advance and set a share order all at
once. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (0, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)”(P. 119), “Transferring images to a smartphone” (P. 203)3

• You can set a share order on 200 frames.
• Share orders cannot include RAW images.

$
Pictures can also be marked for sharing using the H (R)button. If the H (R) button is currently assigned a role otherthan [h], assign it the [h] role using the [qR Function] option
in the custom menus (P. 164).

2019.12.01 12:30:00

21

Selecting Multiple Pictures(0, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple images for [0], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order Selected].
Press the H (R) button to select an image; a v icon willappear on the image. Press the H (R) button again tocancel the selection.
Press the Q button to display the menu, and then selectfrom [0], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order Selected].
This function is also available in single-frame playback.
2019.12.01 12:30:00

21

EN 119Print order(DPOF)

You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
 Creating a print order

3

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
Select [<] or [<ALL] and press the Q button.

Playback

Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat thisstep. Press the Q button when all the desired pictures
have been selected.
All pictures
Select [<ALL] and press the Q button.

3

Print Order

<

ALL

Back

Select the date and time format and press the Q
button.
No

The pictures are printed without the date and
time.

Date

The pictures are printed with the shooting date.

Time

The pictures are printed with the shooting time.

Set

X

No
Date
Time

Back

Set

• When printing images, the setting cannot be changed
between the images.

4

Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.

120 EN Removing all or selected pictures from the print order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).

3

Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.

4

Select the date and time format and press the Q button.

5

Select [Set] and press the Q button.

Select [<] and press the Q button.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the Q button. To
exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the Q button.
• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the Q button once you have removed
all the desired pictures from the print order.

Playback• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

3

EN 121

Adding Audio to Pictures(R)

You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external
microphone and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement
for written notes about the pictures.
• Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.

3
Playback

1

Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.

2

Select [R] and press the Q button.

• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio can also be added to pictures using the [Edit] option in the playback menu. Use[Edit] > [Sel. Image] to select the picture, then press the Q button and select [R].
JPEG

• To exit without adding audio, select [No].

JPEG Edit
Share Order
0
R
Rotate<Back

3Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.

4

Press the Q button to end recording.
• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons andindicators showing the recording rate.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.

Set
R

No
R Start
Erase
Back

Set

%
• Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using[Movie R] (P. 146, 150) in the n video menu.

 Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust thevolume:12122 EN

Press the q button to display a picture.
Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.

Playback Using Touch Controls
Pictures can be viewed using touch controls.
 Full-frame playback
Displaying the previous or next image• Slide your finger to the left to view the next image, andright to view the previous image.

3
Playback

Magnify• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your finger to scroll the display when the picture iszoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q for calendar playback.

 Index/Calendar playback
Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your finger up to view the next page, and down toview the previous page.
• Tap Q or R to switch the number of images
displayed. g [G Settings] (P. 166)
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback.

2019.12.01
S 12:30:00

21

Viewing images• Tap an image to view it full frame.

EN 123

Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly tap the screen to display the touch menu. You canthen perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.

3
Playback
124 ENH

Select an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.

h

Images you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting
Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 119)0

Protects an image.

• Do not tap the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

4 Menu functions
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV
super control panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
Tab

Description

W

Shooting Menu 1

Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting oraccess basic photo settings.

X

Shooting Menu 2

Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.

nVideo Menu

Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.

q

Playback Menu

Playback- and retouch-related items.

G

Custom Menu

Items for customizing the camera.

d

Setup Menu

Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Shooting Menu 1
11

Tab

2

Operation guide
Back

Reset / Custom Modes
Preliminary and basic
PictureModeshooting
options.
KK
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i

YF
4:3
Off

Set

Press the MENU button
to go back one screen

Guide

Press the Q button toconfirm the setting

4
Menu functions (Basic operations)1

Tab name• A guide is displayed about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO
button to view or hide guides.

2

Use FG to select a tab and press the Q button.
• The menu group tab appears when the G Custom
Menu is selected. Use FG to select the menu groupand press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF
1 A1 KAF Mode

S-AF

S1/C2/M1
2 A2 KAEL/AFL
A3
AF Scanner
mode2
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity±0B
C1 KC-AF Center Start
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
D1
Back

Set

Menu group

EN 125

3

Select an item using FG and press the Q button to display options for theselected item.
Function

The current setting
is displayed

Shooting Menu 2
1
22

Back

4
Menu functions (Basic operations)
126 EN

4

Bracketing
HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode

Off
Off
Off
Off

Q

Shooting Menu 2
1
22

Off
Set

Bracketing
HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode

Back

Off
On

Off
Off
Off
Off

Off
Set

Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Default Settings” (P. 229).
• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the front and rear dials in place of the arrow pad.

Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
Shooting Menu 1
11
2

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i

Back

YF
4:3
Off

Set

Shooting Menu 1

Shooting Menu 2

W

X

Bracketing (P. 132)
HDR (P. 137)
Multiple Exposure (P. 139)
Keystone Comp. (P. 141)
Anti-Shock r/Silent s (P. 142)
High Res Shot (P. 143)
#RC Mode (P. 143, 216)

Restoring Default Settings

4(Reset)Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings. You can opt to reset almost
all settings or only those directly related to photography.

1

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

2

Select [Reset] and press the I button.

3

Highlight [Full] or [Basic], and press the Q button.

4
5

Press the Q button in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.

Reset / Custom Modes
Reset
Basic
Assign to Custom Mode
Recall from Custom Mode

Back

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Reset / Custom Modes (P. 127)
Picture Mode (P. 98, 129)
KK (P. 88, 129)
Image Aspect (P. 87)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 130)
j/Y/i (drive/time-lapse shooting)(P. 71, 73, 131)

Set

• To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight [Full] and press
the Q button. g “Default Settings” (P. 229)

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

EN 127

Saving Settings(Assign to Custom Mode)

Editing custom settings
Current camera settings can be saved to any of three Custom Modes. Saved settings can berecalled by rotating the mode dial to C or using [Recall from Custom Mode].
• [Custom Mode C2] and [Custom Mode C3] can be recalled using [Recall from Custom
Mode].

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

1

Adjust settings in order to save.

2

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

3
4

Select [Assign to Custom Mode] and press I.

5

Select [Set] and press the Q button.

• Set the mode dial to the positions other than AUTO (B), ART, or movie (n) mode.

Highlight the desired destination ([Custom Mode C], [Custom Mode C2], or[Custom Mode C3]) and press the Q button.
• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom mode, highlight [Reset] and press
the Q button.

Recalling Saved Settings
In modes P, A, S, M, B, and C, you can recall saved settings but not the shooting mode.
The shooting mode remains that currently selected with the mode dial.

1

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [Recall from Custom Mode] and press I.

4

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Highlight [Custom Mode C], [Custom Mode C2], or [Custom Mode C3] andpress I.

• Settings saved to [Custom Mode C] can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to C.

128 ENProcessing options(Picture Mode)

You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in[Picture Mode] (P. 98) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picturemode separately.

1

Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress the Q button.

Shooting Menu 1
11
2• The camera will display the picture mode available in thecurrent shooting mode.

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i

Back

2

YF
4:3
Off

Set

Select an option with FG and press the Q button.

%• You can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu.
g [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 166)

Photo File and Image Size Options(KK)

g “Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)” (P. 88)• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes andcompression rates (K Set)” (P. 196)

Menu functions (Shooting menu)• Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are notavailable for some picture modes.
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].

4

EN 129Digital Zoom

(Digital Tele-converter)

This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size
option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to fill the display. The zoom
ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’ maximum focal
length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch lenses or find it difficult
to get any closer to your subject.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
130 EN

1

Select [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1, and press the Q
button.

23Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

• When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2×and a H icon is displayed. Pictures will be recorded at
the new zoom ratio.

Digital teleconverter
S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023• The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation,
fisheye correction, or the SCN mode panorama option.
• This function is not available when the information of [Movie Effect] is displayed on thescreen in movie mode.
• This function is not available when [Movie 6] is assigned to a button with [n Button
Function].
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, aframe shows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image
during playback.
• During zoom, the size of the AF targets increases and their number decreases.

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval(Time lapse shooting)

You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.

1

Select [j/Y/i] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press
the Q button.

Shooting Menu 1
11
2

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i

Back

Set

4

Select [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] and press I.
Select [On] and press I.
Adjust the following settings and press the Q button.

Number of Frames

Sets the number of frames to be shot.

Start Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the first shot.

Interval Length

Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting
has begun.

Time Lapse Movie

Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.
[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use themto create a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them tocreate a time-lapse movie.

Movie Settings

Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([FrameRate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].

5

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2
3
4

YF
4:3
Off

Press the Q button repeatedly to return to W Shooting Menu 1.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A 99 icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon
shows the selected number of shots).

Interval-timer photography
99

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

6

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Take pictures.

• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] (P. 159) operates for 0.5 seconds.

EN 131

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
132 EN• If either of the time before shooting, or shooting interval is set to 1 minute 31 seconds
or longer, the monitor and camera power will turn off after 1 minute. 10 seconds before
shooting, the power will automatically turn on again. When the monitor is off, press the
shutter button to turn it on again.
• If the AF mode (P. 80) is set to [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR], it is automatically changed to[S-AF].
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• This function cannot be used with HDR photography.
• Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with bracketing or multiple exposure.
• The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• If the camera automatically turns off in interval between shots, it will turn on in time for the
next shot.
• If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• If you turn off the camera, time lapse shooting will be canceled.
• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is charged enough before shooting.
• Time-lapse movies created at a size of [4K] may not display on some computer systems.
More information is available on the OLYMPUS website.

Varying settings over a series of photographs(Bracketing)

Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balanceover a series of shots. Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine several
different forms of bracketing. Use bracketing if you are unsure what settings to use orlack the time needed to change settings during shooting. You can also store bracketing
settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.
AE BKT (AE bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can selectAE BKT
2F1.0EVOff
the bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In
WB BKTA-- G-2f 0.3EV
single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
FL BKT
2f 0.7EV -ISO BKT
2f 1.0EV -time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in
ART BKT
3f 0.3EV -sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
Focus BKT
3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV
in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all theBack
Set
way down: no modification, negative, positive. Number of shots:
2, 3, 5, or 7
• The camera modifies exposure by varying aperture and shutter speed ( P mode), shutter
speed (A and M modes), or aperture (S mode). If [All] is selected for [ISO-Auto] (P. 169)
in M mode and [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 70, 80), the camera modifies
exposure by varying ISO sensitivity.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step].
g [EV Step] (P. 169)
• Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with FL or focus bracketing.

WB BKT (WB bracketing)
WB BKT
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in
specified color directions) are automatically created from one
A-B
G-M
shot, starting with the value currently selected for white balance.
3f 4Step
3f 4Step• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Red– Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for whiteBack
Setbalance compensation.
• WB bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.

2F1.0EVA-- G-Off -3f 0.3EV-3f 0.7EV-3f 1.0EV-Set

ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping
AE BKT
2F1.0EV
the shutter speed and aperture fixed. You can select theWB BKTA-- G-bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. Each
FL BKT-Off -ISO BKTtime the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three
3f 0.3EV
ART BKT-frames with the set sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected,
3f 0.7EV
Focus BKT
-3f 1.0EV
the optimal sensitivity setting) on the first shot, negative
Back
Set
modification on the second shot, and positive modification on
the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change with the value selected for [ISOStep]. g [ISO Step] (P. 169)
• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with [ISO-Auto Set]. g [ISOAuto Set] (P. 169)

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

FL BKT (FL bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies flash level over three shots (no modification
AE BKTon the first shot, negative on the second, and positive on the
WB BKT
third). The amount can be chosen from 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 EV. In
FL BKT
ISO BKT
single-frame shooting, one shot is taken each time the shutter
ART BKT
button is pressed; in sequential shooting, all shots are taken
Focus BKT
while the shutter button is pressed.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value Backselected for [EV Step]. g [EV Step] (P. 169)
• Flash bracketing cannot be combined with AE or focus bracketing.

• ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Each time the shutter is released, the camera records multiple
images, each with a different art filter setting. You can turn art
filter bracketing on or off separately for each picture mode.
• Recording may take some time.
• With the exceptions of AE and FL bracketing, ART bracketing
cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

ART BKT
Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back

H

EN 133

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
134 EN

Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves
successively farther from the initial focus position. Choose thenumber of shots using [Set number of shots] and the change
in focus distance using [Set focus differential]. Choose smaller
values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the change in focus
distance, larger values to widen it. If you are using a flash otherthan the dedicated flash unit, you can specify the time it takes tocharge using the [#Charge Time] option.
Press the shutter button all the way down and release it
immediately. Shooting will continue until the selected number ofshots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way
down again.
• Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that havemounts conforming to the Four-Thirds standard.
• Focus bracketing ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during
shooting.
• Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity.
• Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent
mode.
• To use the flash, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings] >[Flash Mode].
g [Silent s Mode Settings] (P. 142)
• Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms ofbracketing.

Bracketing
AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

2F1.0EVA-- G----Off -On

Back

Set
Set number of shots

0 0 3

Back

Set
Focus BKT

Focus Stacking
Wide OffSet number of shots
9910
Set focus differential
5
3 0sec#Charge Time
1
Narrow
Back

Set#Charge Time
30sec

Select time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using an Olympus flash.
Back

Set

Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
Focus BKTThe focus position is automatically shifted to capture 8 shots
Focus Stacking
Offwhich are then composited for a single JPEG image that is in
Set number of shots
99
focus all the way from the foreground to background.
Set focus differential
5#Charge Time
0sec
• The focus position is automatically shifted based on thecenter of the focal position and 8 frames are captured in asingle shot.
Back
Set• If compositing fails, the image will not be saved.
• Focus stacking ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during shooting.
• The angle of view for composited images is narrower than the original images.
• A frame indicating the final crop will be shown in the display. Compose the shot with yoursubject in the frame.
• Guide line selected in [Displayed Grid] (P. 168) will not be displayed.
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be used with [Focus
Stacking].
• Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

1

Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2
Off
Off
Off
Off

Bracketing
22 HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
1

Off

Back

2

After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.
• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.

Set
Shooting Menu 2

Bracketing
22 HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
1

Off
On

Off

Back

Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display bracketing options for theselected bracketing type.

Set
Bracketing

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

2F1.0EVA-- G------

Back

4

Set

Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or a bracketing program.
• AE BKT
Highlight the number of shots (for example, 2f) andpress the I button to view bracketing amounts. Use theFG buttons to highlight an amount and press Q to
select the highlighted option and return to the previous
display.

Bracketing
AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

2F1.0EVOffA-- G-2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV -2f 1.0EV -3f 0.3EV -3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV

Back• WB BKTYou will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or
G–M). Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and theFG buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press
the Q to return to the previous display when settings
are complete.

Set
WB BKT

A-B

G-M

3f 4Step

3f 4Step

Back• ART BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu
of picture modes and art filters. Use the FG buttons
to highlight the desired filters and press the Q button
to select (selected filters are indicated by check marks).
Press the MENU button to return to the previous
display when settings are complete.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

3

Off
Off
Off
Off

Set
ART BKT
Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2Light Tone
Grainy Film 1

Back

H

EN 135• Focus BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus
bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlighta setting and press the I button. Options will be
displayed; use the FG buttons to highlight an option
and press the Q button to return to the setting menu.
Press the Q button again to return to the bracketingmenu when settings are complete. The [Focus BKT]
menu is also used for [Focus Stacking] settings(P. 134).

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
136 EN

5
6

Focus BKT
Focus Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

Back

Set

With [On] selected, press the Q button to save changes and exit.
Confirm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] andpress the Q button.
• To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the
MENU button or highlight [Off] and press the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
22 HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
1

Back

7

Off
99
5
0sec

Off
On

Off
Off
Off
Off

Off
Set

Take pictures.
• A t icon is displayed when bracketing is active.

• Bracketing cannot be combined with HDR, interval-timer photography, digital shift,
multiple-exposure photography, high res shots, or fisheye compensation.
• Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card forthe selected number of frames.
• AE, FL, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images(HDR)

The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with awide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press I
on the arrow pad.

Shooting Menu 2

Set

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

HDR
HDR1

• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

Takes 4 pictures at onceat different exposures andcomposites automatically intoa high contrast image.
Back

HDR1

HDR2
3f 2.0EV
5f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV
7f 2.0EV

Set

Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for naturallooking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
• [ISO] is fixed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is fixed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots canhowever be combined using HDR software on acomputer or other device.

4

Off

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Back

3

Off
Off
Off
Off

Bracketing
22 HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode1

3f 2.0EV
Number ofshots

Exposurerange

EN 137

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• The camera will return to the shooting display. An c
icon will be displayed.
• The drive mode will be fixed at T (sequential high).

c iconHDR

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

5

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
138 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number ofshots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into asingle picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.
• In mode M, the camera takes the values selected for aperture and shutter speed as abase for HDR photography.

• Use a tripod or take similar measures to fix the camera in place.
• The image displayed in the monitor or viewfinder during shooting differs from the final
HDR picture.
• Noise may appear in the final picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1]
or [HDR2] mode.
• The following cannot be used:flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystonecompensation, and fisheye correction.

%• [HDR] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable it.
g [K Button Function] (P. 107)

Recording multiple exposures in a single image(Multiple Exposure)Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take ashot and combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.
The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures
can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image.
If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then selectit for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Number of Frames
Auto Gain
Overlay

Off
Off
Off

Back

3

[Off]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.
[2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.

Auto Gain[On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.
[Off]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in themultiple exposure.

Overlay[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
• [Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number ofFrames].

• Highlight a picture using the arrow pad (FGHI) andpress the Q button.
• Only RAW images can be selected.

4

Set

Number of
FramesIf [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will beprompted to choose a picture for the multiple
exposure.

4

Multiple Exposure

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

12Overlay
RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

Back

Set

Press the Q button in the multiple exposure menu to save the selected
settings.
• The shooting menu will be displayed.

EN 139

5

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A a icon will be displayed.
• If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will bevisible superimposed on the view through the lens.

a iconP

0

6

Take pictures.

7

Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple exposure
photography.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
140 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023• The first shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previously-chosen photograph) will bevisible superimposed on the view through the lens as you compose the next shot.
• The a icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
• Pressing the  button allows you to retake the first shot.
• If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional pictures that will be overlaid
on the previously-chosen photograph.

• If you end multiple exposure photography by pressing the MENU button, [Off] will beselected for [Number of Frames] in the multiple exposure menu.
• The a icon clears from the display when multiple exposure photography ends.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
• Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
• Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in effect.
• Performing any of the following operations after the first shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when thebattery is exhausted.
• The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs takenwith RAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
• Live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) is not available in mode B.
• The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, and fisheye
correction.
• Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.

Keystone correction and perspective control(Keystone Comp.)

Keystone distortion due to the influence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject
can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystonecompensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image iscreated from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the effective zoom ratio.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

12
3

Select [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2, and press the Q button.
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and z icon be displayed.

Keystone compensation

4

250 F5.6

Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject
in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make verticaladjustments.
• Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in thedisplay.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The direction in which the crop
can be moved is shown by an arrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the Q button.

5

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

P

4

To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the
INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A z icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon is displayedin green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 4, press the INFO
button repeatedly.

6

Take pictures.

• Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged whencropped and whether the crop can be moved.
• Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
• Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g,h, i, or j icon in the display.

EN 141

• Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,fisheye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF] and [C-AF+TR]
AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res
Shot.
• Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
• Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length
supplied for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 196).
• Be sure to provide [K Image Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four
Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 86).

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
142 EN%• [Keystone Comp.] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable keystone compensation. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)

Setting anti-shock/silent shooting(Anti-Shock r/Silent s)

By setting anti-shock/silent shooting, you can select anti-shock or silent shooting whenusing sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 71).

1

Select [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q
button.

2

Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Anti-Shock r

Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter release when shooting in anti-shockmode. Use this mode to suppress small vibrations caused by
the operation of the shutter. Anti-shock mode is available in bothsequential shooting and self-timer modes (P. 71).

Silent s

Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed
all the way down and the shutter release when shooting in silent
mode. Use this option in settings in which the sound of the shutter
would be unwelcome. Silent mode supports both the self-timer andsequential shooting (P. 71).

Noise Reduction s

Select [Auto] to reduce image “noise” in long exposures duringsilent photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible whennoise reduction is active.

Silent s Mode
Settings

Choose whether to enable [8], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] insilent mode.
Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [NotAllow] to ignore current settings and disable the selected item.

Setting high resolution shooting(High Res Shot)

By specifying the setting for [High Res Shot], high resolution shooting can be activatedby selecting h from options for sequential shooting/self-timer mode (P. 71).

1
2

Select [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. Use this option toprevent blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button
is pressed. Select [Off] to disable High Res Shot.

#Charge Time

Choose how the long the camera waits for the flash to charge forHigh Res Shots taken with the flash. You need not specify a value
when using an external flash.

• Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.
• g “Using a flash (Flash photography)” (P. 93)

Shooting with remote control wireless flash(#RC Mode)

Wireless remote-control flash units can be used with the supplied flash unit for wirelessremote-control flash photography. g “Wireless remote control flash photography”(P. 216)4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)High Res Shot

EN 143

Using the Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu.

Video Menu
1
2

nMode Settings
nSpecification Settings
nAF/IS Settings
nButton/Dial/LevernDisplay Settings
Movie RnHDMI Output

Back

4
Menu functions (Video menu)
144 ENOn
Set

OptionDescriptiongn Mode Settings[n Mode]: Choose a movie record mode.
[n Flicker Scan]: Select [On] to reduce flicker caused by
LED lighting. Rotate the front or rear dial or use FG on
the arrow pad to choose the shutter speed at which flicker
reduction applies.

147

Sets the image quality for movie recording.
[nK]: Set a combination of image quality size and bit
rate.
[n Noise Filter]: Select a noise reduction level forrecording high-sensitivity movies.
[n Picture Mode]: Record in a picture mode suitable forediting when set to [On].

149[n AF Mode]: Choose the AF mode for movie recording.
[n Image Stabilizer]: Sets image stabilization for movie
recording.

80, 86n Specification
Settings

n AF/IS Settings

Optionn Button/Dial/
Lever

Descriptiong4—

Menu functions (Video menu)

Set the button, dial, and lever functions for movie mode.
[n Button Function]: Sets functions to buttons for movie
mode.
[n Dial Function]: Sets the functions of the rear dial andfront dial for movie mode. If [Exposure F] is assigned to
the front or rear dial, exposure compensation is possible up
to ±3 EV (steps of 1/2 and 1 EV are also supported).
[n Fn Lever Function]: Sets functions to be switched by
the Fn lever in movie mode. The Fn lever switches to thefunction set with [n Dial Function] when set to [mode1]. To
choose the function selected using the Fn lever, highlight[mode2], press I, and choose from AF mode, AF target
mode, and AF target selection. This setting has no effectwhen [mode3] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function](P. 164) or when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected for [FnLever/Power Lever] (P. 164).
[n Shutter Function]: Sets the shutter button function formovie mode. When set to [w], pressing the shutter button
initiates autofocus. Still image photography is not available.
When set to [R REC], movie recording can be started or
stopped by pressing the shutter button all the way down.
The R button cannot be used for starting or stopping
movie recording with this setting.
[n Elec. Zoom Speed]: Choose the zoom speed for powerzoom lenses. This can be used for slow zooms on yoursubject and other effects. Choose from [Low], [Normal],and [High].

EN 145

Option4
Menu functions (Video menu)
146 EN

Descriptiongn Display Settings [n Control Settings]: Sets whether to display Live Control(P. 187) and Live SCP (P. 79) in movie mode. For
setting not to display, select the item and press the Q
button to clear the check mark.
[n Info Settings]: Sets the information to be displayedon the movie recording screen. For setting not to display,
select the item and press the Q button to clear the check
mark.
[Time Code Settings]: Set the time codes to record formovie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record timecodes corrected for errors with respect to recording time,
and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to record uncorrected timecodes.
Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during
recording only, and to [Free Run] to run time codes evenwhile recording is stopped, including when the camera isturned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code. Set[Current Time] to set the time code for the current frame to
00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select [Reset]. You can also set
time codes using [Manual Input].

—Movie R

Audio will not be recorded in a movie when set to [Off].

150

n HDMI Output

Sets the output setting for recording movies with thiscamera connected with an external device via HDMI.
[Output Mode]: Sets the video output mode. When set to[Monitor Mode], image and camera information are output.
The camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.
• This option is not available when a frame size of [4K] or[C4K] is selected for [n Specification Settings] > [nK](P. 149).
[REC Bit]: If set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from thecamera to the connected external device.
[Time Code]: If set to [On], the time code is sent from thecamera to the connected external device.
• The recording by the external device that uses the timecode as the REC trigger may be stopped in the following
cases.
- When recording an ART movie, etc., under heavy
processing load
- When switching the display between the monitor andviewfinder—Choosing an Exposure Mode(n Mode (Movie Exposure Modes))You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M
modes. This option takes effect when the mode dial is rotated to n.

1
2
3

Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) and press I.
Use FG to select an option and press the Q button.
Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial (r) or rear dial (o) to adjust exposure compensation.

A

Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial (r) to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust
aperture.

S

Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial (r) to adjust
exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.

M

Aperture and shutter speed can be manually set.
Use the front dial (r) to select aperture value and the rear dial (o) to selectshutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.
ISO sensitivity can only be set manually to values between 200 and 6400.

• Blurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open
can be reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
• The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie recordmode.
• Excessive camera shake may not be compensated enough.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)P

EN 147

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(n Flicker Scan)

Banding may occur in movies filmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This option is in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

4

1
2
3
4
5

Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (movie exposure modes).
Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the video menu and press the Q button.
Highlight [n Flicker Scan] and press I.
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Video menu)

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• A P icon is displayed when flicker scan isenabled.
n

250.0

P

P icon6

7

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or
the FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is nolonger visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and then250.0
P icon will no longer be displayed. You can adjust
Shutter speed
aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker
scan display.

P

Begin filming when settings are complete.

• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker
scan display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scandisplay.

%• [n Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable flicker scan. g [n Button Function] (P. 107)148 ENFrame Size, Rate, and Compression(nK)

You can set combinations of movie image size and bit rate. The settings can beselected from options of movie record mode (P. 89).

1
2
3

Select [n Specification Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [nK] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Sets the image size to [C4K] (Custom only), [4K], [FHD] (Full HD), or[HD].

Bit rate

Sets the bit rate to [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), or [N](Normal).
• When [4K] or [C4K] is set for the image size, you cannot select the
bit rate.

Frame rate

Sets the frame rate to [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], or [24p].
• [60p] and [50p] are not available in the following situations.
- When [FHD] (Full HD) is set for the image size and [A-I] (All Intra)
is set for the bit rate.
- When [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
• If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.
• When shooting movies that will be viewed on a television, choose aframe rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as
otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards
vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.
- When shooting for display on NTSC devices, choose 60p (30p)- When shooting for display on PAL devices, choose 50p (25p)

Slow or Fast
MotionSets slow or fast motion.
Available settings differ depending on the set frame rate.
• Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality modes.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Image size

EN 149Sound Recording Options(Movie R)

Adjust settings for recording sound during filming. You can also access settings for use
when an external microphone or recorder is connected.

1
2
3

4

Select [Movie R] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [On] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Video menu)

Recording Volume

Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for thebuilt-in stereo microphone and external microphones.
[Built-In R]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
microphone.
[MIC R]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connectedto the microphone jack.

R Volume Limiter

Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record
sound. Use this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds
above a certain volume.

Wind Noise
Reduction

Reduce wind noise during audio recording.

Recording Rate

Choose an audio recording format.
[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.

R Plug-in Power

Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and otherdevices that draw power from the camera.
[Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera(general-purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).

PCM Recorder R Link

Adjust settings for use with external IC recorders. Record a slate
tone or choose whether camera controls can be used to start andstop recording when using an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder.
[Camera Rec. Volume]: Choose [Operative] to record sound at thelevel selected with the camera, [Inoperative] to record sound at thelevel selected with the recorder.
[Slate Tone]: Enable or disable slate tone recording.
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Choose whether audio recording begins
and ends at the same time as movie recording.

• Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it fromrecording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [n AF Mode] (P. 80) to [S-AF], [MF],or [PreMF], or by minimizing the button operations of the camera.
• Sound is not recorded:with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when k (diorama) is selected for
picture mode.
• When [Movie R] is set to [Off], O is displayed.
• Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [RecordingRate].

150 ENUsing the Olympus LS-100 IC Recorder
When recording audio with an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder, you can use camera
controls to record slate tones or to start and stop recording.
Connect the LS-100 using the USB cable and a third-party stereo mini-jack cable. Usea “no resistance” cable.
• Additional information is available in the documentation provided with the LS-100. Be sure
the recorder firmware has been updated to the latest version.

1

Connect the IC recorder.

Third-party stereo mini-jack cable

USB adapter (suppliedwith LS-100)

USB cable (supplied with E-M5 Mark 3)

2

Adjust [PCM Recorder R Link] settings:• MENU buttonn (video) menu
[Movie R][On][PCM Recorder R Link]
Press I on thearrow pad
[Camera Rec. Volume]: Select [Inoperative].
[Slate Tone]: Select [On].
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Select [On].

4
Menu functions (Video menu)• When the LS-100 is connected via the micro USB connector, a message will be
displayed prompting you to choose a connection type. Select [PCM Recorder].
• If no message is displayed, adjust menu settings as follows:
G (custom menu) tab
S tab[USB Mode]
SelectMENU button[Auto] or [PCM Recorder]

R Settings
Recording Volume
RVolume Limiter
OffWind Noise Reduction
Off
Recording Rate
48kHz/16bit
RPlug-in PowerOffPCM Recorder R Link
Back

Set

After adjusting settings, check that [On] is selected for [Movie R] and press the
MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

3

Start filming.

4

End filming.

• The LS-100 will begin recording audio.
• To record a slate tone, press and hold the Q button.
• The LS-100 will stop recording audio.

EN 151

%• You can choose how long you have to keep the button pressed to record a slate tone.
g [Press-and-hold Time] (P. 174)
• Disconnect the USB cable when the camera is off or the recorder is not in use.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)
152 ENUsing the Playback Menu
Playback Menu
R (P. 153)
Edit (P. 153)
Print Order (P. 120)
Reset Protect (P. 158)
Reset share Order (P. 158)
Device Connection (P. 201)

Playback Menu
1
2

R
Edit
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Device Connection

Back

On

Set

If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in
the correct orientation on the playback display.

Retouching Pictures(Edit)Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust thesettings in effect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picturemode (art filters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as
cropping and resizing.

1
2
3

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

4

Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the Q button.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and [JPEG Edit] if a JPEG
image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit]and [JPEG Edit] are displayed. Select the desired option from them.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback(R)

Creates a JPEG copy of a RAW image according to the selected settings.

Current
RAW Data
Edit

Custom1
Custom2
ART BKT

Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG
format. Adjust the camera settings before choosing thisoption. Some settings such as exposure compensation are
not applied.
Press R and adjust settings while previewing the resultsin the display. The settings are saved as [Custom1] or[Custom2].
The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image,
one for each art filter selected. Select one or more filters
and apply them to one or more images.

EN 153

The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.

JPEG Edit

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)

Shadow Adj.

Brighten back-lit subjects.

Red-eye Fix

Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a flash.

P

Crop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dialand position it with the arrow pad.

AspectChange the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2],[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After choosing an aspect ratio, use
the arrow pad to position the crop.

Black & WhiteCreate a black-and-white copy of the current picture.

Sepia

Create a sepia copy of the current picture.

Saturation

Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can bepreviewed in the display.

Q

Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 ×
240 pixels in size. Pictures with an aspect ratio otherthan the standard 4:3 are resized to dimensions as close
as possible to the selected option.

e-Portrait

Smooth complexions. The desired effect may not be
achieved if no faces are detected.

• Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results with some pictures.
• Retouch is not available:with pictures that were taken with another camera or edited on a computer or if thespace available on the memory card is insufficient.

5

Press the Q button when settings are complete.

6

Press the Q button again.

• The selected settings will be applied.
RAW Data Edit

• Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button to save the retouched copy.
Yes
No
Back

Set

• To create additional copies from the same original RAW image, highlight [Reset] andpress the Q button. To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] and press the Q
button.
• Selecting [Reset] displays the retouch menu. Repeat the process from Step 4.
• You can also edit selected pictures during playback.
Display a picture you want to retouch
Press the Q button to view
q button
options[RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit]• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
• [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3(standard).
• When [ART] is selected for picture mode, [Color Space] (P. 105) will be locked at [sRGB].

154 ENCombining Pictures(Image Overlay)

Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modified by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.
• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays createdwith [RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using
the image quality option selected for [K2] (P. 171).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

4

Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.
Use FGHI to select the RAW images to beoverlaid.
• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,press the Q button again.
• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of thenumber specified in step 3 are selected.

5

Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.

6

Press the Q button to display the confirmation
dialog.

Image Overlay
RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

Back

Set
Image Overlay• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check theresults in the monitor.

• Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

×0.3
Back

×1.5

×0.5
Set

Menu functions (Playback menu)

1
2
3
4

EN 155Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture)

Save a still copy of a selected frame.
• This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)
156 EN

1
2
3
4
5
6

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.
• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to rewind and the G button to advance.

Trimming movies(Movie Trimming)

Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create files
containing only footage you want to preserve.
• This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.

1
2
3
4
5

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

6

Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.

7

Trim the movie.

8Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.

• You will be presented with an edit display.
• Use the F button to skip to the first frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial, select the first frame of the footage you want to delete andpress the Q button.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the Q button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the
Q button.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)• You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new file.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
• If the image is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].

EN 157

Removing Protection from All Pictures(Reset Protect)Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.

1
2

Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Cancelling a share order(Reset share Order)

Cancel share orders that are set on images.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)
158 EN

1

Select [Reset share Order] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.

2

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Using the setup menu
Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language
selection and monitor brightness. The setup menu also
contains options used during the initial setup process.

Setup Menu
1
2

Card Setup
X’19.12.01 12:30:00
W
Englishs
j±0 k±0
Rec View
0.5secWi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware

Back

OptionSet

g

Description
Format the card and delete all images.

160

X (Date/time setting)Set the camera clock.

27

W (Changing thedisplay language)

Choose a language for camera menus and guides.

29

You can adjust thes (Monitor
brightness adjustment) brightness and color
temperature of themonitor. Color temperatureadjustment is only
applied to the monitor
display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j(color temperature) or k
(brightness) and FG toadjust the value.

s
j
-2

Vivid
Back

k
+1

NaturalSet—

Press the INFO button to switch the saturation of themonitor between [Natural] and [Vivid] settings.
Rec View

Sets whether to display the captured image on themonitor after shooting, and the length of time for the
display. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you
have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the
shutter button halfway even while the captured image isdisplayed on the monitor.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Sets the length of time (seconds) todisplay the captured image on the monitor.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[Auto q]: Displays the captured image, and thenswitches to playback mode. This is useful for erasing a
picture after checking it.

—

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings

Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetoothcompatible smartphones using the camera’s wirelessfunction.

160

Firmware

Displays the firmware versions of the camera andconnected accessories. Check the versions when you
inquire about the camera or accessories or when you
download the software.

—

4
Menu functions (Setup menu)

Card Setup

EN 159Formatting the card

(Card Setup)

Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used withother cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card isformatted.
When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keepon the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 211)

1

4

Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

Card Setup• If there is data on the card, menu items appear. Select[Format] and press the Q button.

All Erase
FormatMenu functions (Setup menu)

Back

2

Set

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Formatting is performed.

Deleting all images(Card Setup)

All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.

1

Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

Card Setup

2

Select [All Erase] and press the Q button.

All Erase
Format

Back

3

Set

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All images are deleted.

Wireless LAN Options(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)

Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Frame and shoot pictures remotelyfrom a smartphone, or leave the camera off and view pictures on your smartphone
while on the road. For information on establishing a connection and using thesefeatures, see “5. Connecting the camera to a smartphone” (P. 200).
Availability

Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®,for example in settings in which their use is prohibited, withoutchanging network settings (P. 207).

Connection Password Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® password.

160 ENPower-off Standby

Choose whether the camera will connect to smartphones while
off.

Reset Settings

Restore defaults for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings].

Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the G Custom Menu.
Custom Menu
S-AF
S1/C2/M1
mode2±0

2 A2 KAEL/AFL

A3
AF Scanner
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity
B
C1 KC-AF Center Start
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
D1

Back

Set

MENU

J AF/MF
OptionCustom Menu
1 A1 KAF ModeG

Description

Jg

K AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for still image shooting.

80

K AEL/AFL

Customize AF and AE lock.

175

AF Scanner

Choose the type of AF scan* performed in autofocus mode
when the camera is unable to focus or the scene lacks
contrast.
* Scans whole range from minimum range to infinity forfocus point when the camera cannot focus on the subject
or the contrast is not clear.
[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.
[mode2]: An AF scan is performed only once at the start of
the focus operation.
[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.

—

Sets the tracking sensitivity for C-AF.

—

When used in combination with an AF-target mode otherthan single target, [C-AF] and [C-AF+TR] focus on thecenter of the selected group only during the initial scan.
During later scans, the camera will focus using thesurrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target
mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on
erratically-moving subjects.

177

When focusing using group- or custom-target AF in [C-AF]
mode, the camera always assigns priority to the centertarget in the selected group for a repeated series of focus
operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using thecenter focus target will it focus using the surrounding targets
in the selected focus group. This helps you track subjects
that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. C-AF
center priority is recommended in most situations.

178

K C-AF
Sensitivity
K C-AF CenterStart

K C-AF Center
Priority

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

J/K/L/I AF/MF (P. 161)
Button/Dial/Lever (P. 164)
M
N/O
Release/j/Image Stabilizer (P. 165)
P/Q/R/S Disp/8/PC (P. 166)
T/U/V
Exp/ISO/BULB/p (P. 169)
W
#Custom (P. 170)
X
K/WB/Color (P. 171)
Record/Erase (P. 172)
Y/Z
EVF (P. 173)ab/c
K Utility (P. 174)

EN 161

K AF/MF
OptionNMode Settings

AF Area Pointer4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

AF Targeting Pad

N Set Home

N CustomSettings

162 ENMENU

G

DescriptionKgChoose the size and shape of the AF target for AF target
mode. To hide an item, select the item and press the Q
button to clear the check mark.

65[On1]: Displays the AF target frame in green.
[On2]: Displays the AF target frame in green while the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
If you select [Off], the AF target frame will not be displayed
during confirmation.
• To enable cluster AF targeting
when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb],
or [C-AF] is chosen for [K AF
Mode] (P. 80), select [On2]for [AF Area Pointer]. The
camera will display AF targets
for all areas that are in focus.

—

If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned bytapping the monitor during viewfinder photography. Tap themonitor and slide your finger to position the AF target.
• When set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or
enabled by double-tapping the monitor.
• [AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF(P. 68).

—Choose the home position AF target mode, AF target
selection mode, and AF mode. Press the Q button to selectthe desired options in the [N Set Home] display. p
appears in the AF target selection display while you choosea home position.

179

You can change the dial and FGHI button functions for
the AF Area screen.
• To use the settings stored in [Set 2], highlight [Set 2] in the[N Custom Settings] menu and press the Q button.
• You can switch to [Set 2] by pressing the INFO button in
the AF-target selection display.

—L AF/MF
Option
AF Limiter

MENU

G

L

Descriptiong

Limits the AF area when turned [On].
[Distance settings]: You can register the AF Limiter area.
You can register up to 3 distance areas.
Numerical value and unit (m, ft) can be set. The distance isapproximate and not exact.
[Release Priority]: If [On] is selected, the shutter can bereleased while AF Limiter is operating even when thecamera is not in focus.
• AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens.
- When using focus bracketing- While in the movie mode or recording a movie—

4

Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator.

—

I Face Priority

You can select the face priority or eye priority AF mode.

67

AF Focus Adj.

Focal location adjustment for phase-difference AF can befine tuned within a range of ±20 steps.

—

MENU

I AF/MF

G

I

DescriptiongPreset MF
distance

Sets the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value andunit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is approximate and notexact.

—MF Assist

Automatically switch to zoom or peaking in manual focus
mode by rotating the focus ring.

180

MF Clutch

Selecting [Inoperative] prevents the lens MF clutch andsnapshot focus being used for manual focus. To focus
manually, slide the focus ring forward.

213

Focus Ring

You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point byselecting the rotational direction of the focus ring.

—

Bulb/Time
Focusing

You can change the focus position during exposure by using
manual focus (MF). When set to [Off], rotation of the focus
ring is disabled.

180

Reset Lens

When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reseteven when the power is turned off. When set to [On], thefocus of power zoom lenses is also reset.

—

OptionMenu functions (Custom menus)

AF Illuminator

EN 163

M Button/Dial/Lever
OptionK ButtonFunction

Menu functions (Custom menus)
164 ENGM
gChoose the function assigned to the selected button.

107

Choose the role played by the R button during playback.
[h]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking pictures
for upload to a smartphone.
[H]: Select multiple pictures.

—

K Dial Function

You can change the function of the front dial and rear dial.

—

Dial Direction

Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction in which the dial is rotated.

—

K Fn Lever
Function

Choose the function performed by the Fn lever.

181

Fn Lever/Power
Lever

Use the Fn lever as a power switch.
[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.
[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 1, and off when in position 2.
[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 2, and off when in position 1.
When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever(power lever), [K Fn Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever
Function] are disabled.

—

Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in orout when the zoom ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it isso quick that you find it hard to frame your subject. Choose
from [Low], [Normal], and [High].

—qR Function

4

MENU
Description

K Elec. Zoom
Speed

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release
Priority
C-AF Release
Priority
jL Settings
jH Settings
Flicker Reduction

MENU

If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF and C-AF modes (P. 80).

—

Choose frame advance rates and shot limits for [j],[♦j], and [♥j] modes. You can also adjust Pro Capture
settings, including the frame advance rate (p only),
number of frames buffered, and the shot limit. Figures forsequential shooting speed are the approximate maximums.

182[Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce flicker during live view undersome kinds of lighting, including fluorescent lamps. If [Auto]does not have the desired effect, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz]
according to the frequency of the local power supply.
[Anti-Flicker Shooting]: The camera automatically detects
the flicker frequency and times the shutter releaseaccordingly.

184

MENU

G

Description

4

Og

Sets image stabilization for still image shooting.

86

Sets the priority function during sequential shooting.
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image
stabilization. The sensor will not be reset to the center
during sequential shooting.
[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting
speed. The sensor will be reset to the center per frame ofsequential shooting. The shooting speed will drop slightly.

—

Half Way Rls
With IS

When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while
the shutter button is pressed halfway will not be activated.

—

Lens I.S. Priority

Select [On] to give priority to lens on-board image
stabilization when shooting with third-party lenses. [S-IS1]
will be used when [S-IS AUTO] is selected for [K Image
Stabilizer] (P. 86).
• This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with
an image stabilization switch.

—j Image
Stabilizer

Menu functions (Custom menus)

OptionNg

O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
K Image
Stabilizer

G

Description

OptionEN 165

P Disp/8/PC

MENU

OptionK Control
Settings

Shooting mode

Menu functions (Custom menus)

B

P/A/S/
M/B

ART

SCN

Live Control (P. 187)









Live SCP (P. 79)









Live Guide (P. 49)



–

–

–

Art Menu (P. 55)

–

–



–

Scene Menu (P. 50)

–

–

–



186

Press the INFO button to switch the screen contents.
Choose the information displayed when the INFO button
is pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.
[qa Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnified
playback.
[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when thecamera is in shooting mode.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index
and calendar playback.

188,
189

Picture Mode
Settings

Select a function to display in the picture mode typeselection screen (P. 98). To hide an item, select the itemand press the Q button to clear the check mark.

—j/Y Settings

Select a function to display in the sequential shooting/selftimer function selection screen (P. 71). To hide an item,
select the item and press the Q button to clear the check
mark.

—

Select a multi function (P. 113) option. When not using thisoption, select the item and press the Q button to clear the
check mark.

—

G/Info Settings

Multi Function
Settings

166 ENPg

Choose the controls displayed in each shooting mode.
Controls

4

G

Description

Q Disp/8/PC

MENU

G

Q

OptionDescriptiongLive View Boost

Shoot while checking the subject even under low-light
conditions. In B mode, you can use this setting whenshooting with BULB/TIME shooting and live composite.
[Off]: Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can bepreviewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time
photography.
[On1]: Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted forease of viewing. The brightness of the preview differs fromthe final photograph.
[On2]: As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shotsof the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview differs from the final
photograph. Subject motion may also appear slightly jerky.

—[mode1]: The filter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. The quality of art filter effectpreviews may be affected.

—[LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view returns to themagnified frame display. When set to [mode2], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view switches to theZoom AF display.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during focus zoom.
When set to [Off], the magnified area is displayed with thebrightness of live view before magnification. This is useful tocheck the focus when shooting in backlit locations.

—qa Default
Setting

Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up
playback).

189

z Settings[z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the
selected value even when releasing the button.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during depth-of-field
preview.

—

LV Close Up
Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Art LV Mode4

EN 167

R Disp/8/PC

R

Sets the guide line display that appears when shooting.
[Display Color]: Sets the guide line color and opacity. Can
be set to [Preset 1] and [Preset 2].
[Displayed Grid]: Select [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1] todisplay a grid on the monitor.
[Apply Settings to EVF]: If [On] is selected, the guides
shown in the monitor will also be displayed in the viewfinderwhen [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. The
setting selected in [EVF Grid Settings] will be invalid.

—

You can change the edge enhancement color and intensity.
The edge enhancement color (red, yellow, white, black) andintensity (Standard, Low, High), and the brightness of thepeaking background (On, Off) can be set.
• If [Image Brightness Adj.] is set to [On], the brightness oflive view is adjusted to enhance the enhancement color.

180

Histogram
Settings[Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.
[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display.

188

Mode Guide

Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode whenthe mode dial is rotated to a new setting.

34

Selfie Assist

Selecting [On] optimizes the display for self-portraits whenthe monitor is in the self-portrait position.

190

Peaking Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

MENU

S Disp/8/PC

G

S

OptionDescriptiong

8 (Beep sound)

When set to [Off], you can turn off the beep sound that isemitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button.

—

HDMI

[Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format forconnecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.
[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
This option takes effect when pictures are displayed on aTV.
[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50pPriority] or [60p Priority] for using the camera connected toa TV with an HDMI cable.

191

Choose a mode for connecting the camera to a computer.
Choose [Auto] to display USB mode options every time thecamera is connected.

208

USB Mode

168 ENGg

Grid Settings

4

MENU
Description

Option

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p

MENU

G

T
g

Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode.
• This reduces the number of exposure compensation
options available in the selected direction.
• The effects are not visible in the monitor. To makenormal adjustments to the exposure, perform exposurecompensation (P. 64).

—

Choose the size of the increments used when selecting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and otherexposure parameters.

—

ISO Step

Select the increments available for choosing ISO sensitivity.

—

ISO-Auto Set[Upper Limit/Default]: Choose the maximum and default ISO
sensitivity used when [AUTO] is selected for ISO. Select[Upper Limit] to choose the maximum sensitivity, [Default] tochoose the default sensitivity. The maximum is 6400.
[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose the shutter speed at which thecamera starts raising ISO sensitivity automatically in modes
P and A. Choose [Auto] to let the camera choose a shutter
speed automatically.

—

Choose the shooting modes in which [AUTO] ISO sensitivity
is available.
[P/A/S]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in allmodes except M.
[All]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes.

—

K Noise Filter

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at highISO sensitivities.

—

Noise Reduct.

This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
[Off]: Noise reduction off.
• The time required for noise reduction is shown in thedisplay.
• [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.

—

Exposure ShiftEV Step

ISO-Auto

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Description

OptionEN 169

U Exp/ISO/BULB/p
OptionBulb/Time Timer

MENU

G

Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography.

—

Bulb/Time Monitor Set the monitor brightness when [BULB], [TIME], or [LIVECOMP] is used.
Live Bulb
Live Time4—

Choose the display interval during shooting. The numberof update times is limited. The frequency drops at high ISO
sensitivities. Choose [Off] to disable the display. Tap themonitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh thedisplay.

192
192

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Composite
Settings

Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite
photography.

193

K Flicker Scan

Reduce flicker under LED lighting.

194
MENU

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p
OptionGVgDescription

Metering

Choose a metering mode according to the scene.

82

AEL Metering

Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when
exposure is locked using the AEL/AFL button. This allows
you to use metering method when exposure is locked bypressing the shutter button halfway and another when
exposure is locked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.
[Auto]: Exposure is metered using the method selected for[Metering] (P. 82).

—

Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [SpotShadow] spot metering options meter the selected AF
target.
• [I Face Priority] turns off automatically.
• The selected option takes effect when M (single target)or o (small target) is selected as the AF-target mode
(P. 65).

—

N Spot Metering

MENU

W #Custom
Option170 ENUg

Description

Description

GWg#X-Sync.

Choose the shutter speed used when the flash fires.

195#Slow Limit

Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash
is used.

195

x+F

When set to [On], the exposure compensation value isadded to the flash compensation value.

64, 97#+WB

Adjust white balance for use with a flash.

—X K/WB/Color
Option
K Set

MENU

K Set

1

Y SF

2) Press the Q button.

Y

2

3

4

F

Y N

X N

Pixel Count

4

Set

Compression
rate

Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall]and press I.

Pixel Count
Xiddle
Wmall

3200×2400
1280×960

2) Choose a pixel count andpress the Q button.
Back

88,
129,
196,
241

Set

Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken athigh ISO sensitivities.

—

WB

Set the white balance. You can also fine-tune the whitebalance for each mode.

83

All x

[All Set]: Use the same white balance compensation in allmodes except [CWB].
[All Reset]: Set white balance compensation for all modes
except [CWB] to 0.

—

W Keep Warm
Color

Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken
under incandescent lighting.

84

Color SpaceYou can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly
reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor
or using a printer.

105

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Image size

88,
129,
196

Yarge

Back

Shading Comp.

Xg

You can select the JPEG image quality mode fromcombinations of three image sizes and three compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –[K4]) and use FG tochange.

Pixel CountG

Description

EN 171

Y Record/EraseGYg[Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numberingcontinues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the file name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the file numbers start at the
number following the highest file number on the card.

—

Choose how image files are named by editing the portion of
the filename highlighted below in gray.
sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg
Pmdd
Adobe RGB: _mdd0000.jpg
mdd—

dpi Settings

Choose the print resolution.

—

Copyright
Settings*

Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of thephotographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.

File Name

4

MENU
Description

Option

Edit Filename

Menu functions (Custom menus)

1) Select characters from 1 and press the Q button.
The selected characters appear in 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight[END] and press the Q button.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button toplace the cursor in the name area 2, highlightthe character, and press .
Copyright Name

2
1

—

05/63

ABCDE
! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] _a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END
o p q r s t u v w x y z { }CancelDeleteSet* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arisingfrom disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings].
Use at your own risk.
Lens Info Settings

172 EN

Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automaticallysupply info to the camera.

196

Z Record/Erase
Option

MENU

G

Z
g

Description

Quick Erase

If [On] is selected, pressing the  button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image.

—

RAW+JPEG Erase

Choose the action performed when a photograph recorded
at a setting of RAW+JPEG is erased in single-frame
playback.
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.
[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted whenselected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 160)
is selected.

88,
119,
129

Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confirmation
dialogs.

—

MENU

a EVF
OptionEVF Auto Switch

G

Descriptionag

If [Off] is selected, the viewfinder will not turn on when
you put your eye to the viewfinder. Use the u button tochoose the display.

—

Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On]. The contrast of the information
display is also adjusted automatically.

—

EVF Style

Choose the viewfinder display style.

197

V Info Settings

Like the monitor, the viewfinder can be used to display
histograms, highlights and shadows, and level gauge. The
level gauge is available when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in[EVF Style].

—

Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the
viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [Grid Settings] > [Apply
Settings to EVF] in G Custom Menu R and [Style 1] or[Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose the framing gridfrom [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1].

—V Half Way Level

If set to [Off], the level gauge will not be displayed when the
shutter button is pressed halfway down. The level gauge isavailable when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in [EVF Style].

—

S-OVF

Select [On] for a viewfinder display similar to an optical
viewfinder. Selecting [S-OVF] makes the details in shadowseasier to see.
is displayed in the viewfinder when [S-OVF] starts.
•• The display is not adjusted for settings such as whitebalance, exposure compensation, and picture mode.

—

EVF Adjust

EVF Grid Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Priority Set

4

EN 173

b K Utilityb

The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to checkand adjust the image pickup device and image processing
functions.

223

Press-and-holdTime

Set the press-and-hold time until the function assigned tothe button operates, from [0.5 sec] to [3.0 sec].

—

Level Adjust

You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
[Reset]: Resets adjusted values to the default settings.
[Adjust]: Sets the current camera orientation as the 0
position.

—

Touchscreen
Settings

Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen.

—Menu Recall

Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position ofoperation when you display a menu. The cursor position will
be retained even when you turn off the camera.

—

Correct fisheye distortion when shooting with fisheye
lenses.

198

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Fisheye
CompensationMENU

c K UtilityGc

Descriptiong

If no operations are performed for the selected period, thebacklight will dim to save battery power. The backlight will
not dim if [Hold] is selected.

—

The camera will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if nooperations are performed for the selected period. The
camera can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button
halfway.

26

Auto Power Off

When in sleep mode, the camera will automatically turn off
after the set time has elapsed.

—

Quick Sleep Mode

If [On] is selected, the camera will immediately enter
energy-saving mode during viewfinder photography(P. 32), reducing the drain on the battery. You can choose
the backlight and sleep times. Energy-saving mode ends
when the shutter button is pressed. The camera will notenter energy-saving mode during live view or while theviewfinder is on.
An “ECO” icon is displayed in the super control panel when[On] is selected.

—

Display certification icons.

—

OptionBacklit LCD

Sleep

Certification

174 ENGg

Pixel Mapping

4

MENU
Description

OptionSetting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL)MENU

G[K AEL/AFL]J

Autofocus and metering can be performed by pressing the
button to which AEL/AFL has been assigned. Choose amode for each focus mode.

S-AF AEL/AFL

mode1
Half Way
Fully
AEL
AFL

Assignments of AEL/AFL function

C-AF

MF

Half-press

Set

AEL/AFL Button
function
When holding down
AEL/AFL

Full press

Focus

Exposure

Focus

Exposure

Focus

Exposure

mode1

S-AF

Locked–––Locked

mode2

S-AF

–

–

Locked–Lockedmode3–

Locked

–

–

S-AF

–

mode1

C-AF start

LockedLocked––Lockedmode2

C-AF start–

LockedLocked–Lockedmode3–

LockedLocked–C-AF start

–

mode4

–

–

LockedLockedC-AF start

–

mode1

–

Locked–––Locked

mode2

–

–

–

Locked–Lockedmode3–

Locked

–

–

S-AF

–

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

S-AF

AEL

Back

Shutter button function
Mode

AEL/S-AF
Exposure

EN 175

C-AF Tracking Sensitivity
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Sensitivity)[K C-AF Sensitivity]

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] selected for [K AF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
176 EN• Choose from five levels of tracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects thatsuddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent thecamera refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by other objects or to prevent thecamera focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF
target.

1

Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] in G Custom Menu
J and press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF
1 A1 KAF Mode

Back

2

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.
• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

Set
A1. AF/MF

1 A1 KAF Mode
2 A2 KAEL/AFL

High S-AF
S1/C2/M1+2

A3
AF Scanner
mode2
+1
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity 00±0B-1C1 KC-AF Center Start-2
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
Low
D1

Back

3

S-AF

S1/C2/M1
2 A2 KAEL/AFL
A3
AF Scanner
mode2
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity±0B
C1 KC-AF Center Start
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
D1

Set

C-AF Starting Focus Target
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Center Start)[K C-AF Center Start]

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF] and[C-AF+TR] focus on the center of the selected group only during the initial scan. Duringlater scans, the camera will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining this option
with an AF-target mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on erraticallymoving subjects.

1

Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF
1 A1 KAF Mode

Set
KC-AF Center Start

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Start] will apply
and then press the Q button.

q
N
r
s

• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,press the Q button again.
Back

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• This option is not available when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 178) is enabled.

H

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Back

2

S-AF

S1/C2/M1
2 A2 KAEL/AFL
A3
AF Scanner
mode2
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity±0B
C1 KC-AF Center Start
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
D1

EN 177

C-AF Center Target Priority
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Center Priority)[K C-AF Center Priority]

When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] mode, the camera always assigns
priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated series of focus
operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target will
it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps you
track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. Center priority is
recommended in most situations.

1

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
178 EN

Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF
1 A1 KAF Mode
2 A2 KAEL/AFL

S-AF
S1/C2/M1
mode2
±0

A3
AF Scanner
A4
KC-AF Sensitivity
B
C1 KC-AF Center Start
C2 KC-AF Center Priority
D1

Back

2

Set
KC-AF Center Priority

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply
and then press the Q button.

Nrs• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,press the Q button again.
Back

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

HChoosing the AF Home Position
MENU

G

K

(N Set Home)[N Set Home]

Choose the home position for the [N Home] feature.
The [N Home] feature lets you recall a previously-saved “home position” forautofocus at the touch of a button. This item is used to choose the home position. To
access [N Set Home], assign it to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 107).
AF ModeChoose the home position autofocus mode.

AF Target Mode

Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for[NMode Settings] (P. 162) are available.

AF Target Point

Choose the home position focus target.

Highlight [N Set Home] in G Custom Menu K
and press the Q button.

A2. AF/MF
1 A1 NMode Settings
2 A2 AF Area Pointer

A3
AF Targeting Pad
A4NSet HomeB
C1 NCustom Settings
C2
D1

Back

2

Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home
position and press the Q button.

Set
NSet HomeAF ModeAF Target Mode
AF Target Point• Selected items are marked with a v. Items marked
with a v are included in the home position.

S-AF
q

Back

3

On1
Off

Press I on the arrow pad to display options for thehighlighted setting.

H
NSet HomeAF ModeAF Target Mode
AF Target Point• Choose settings for the home position.

S-AF
S-AF
C-AF
q
MF
S-AF+MF
C-AF+TR
Preset MF

Back

4

Press the Q button to save changes when settings are complete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

1

4

Set

• The settings list will be displayed.

EN 179Manual Focus Assist
MENU

G

I

(MF Assist)[MF Assist]

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of thesubject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
Magnify

Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AFTarget Point)” (P. 66)

4

Peaking

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You canselect the enhancement color and intensity. g [Peaking Settings](P. 168)

Menu functions (Custom menus)• [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time
the button is pressed. Assign the switching function to one of the buttons in advance using
Button Function (P. 107).
• Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.

Adjusting Focus During Exposures
MENU

G

I

(Bulb/Time Focusing)[Bulb/Time Focusing]

You can adjust focus manually while shooting in B (bulb) mode. This allows you todefocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.

1

Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] in G Custom Menu
I and press the Q button.

A4. AF/MF
1 A1 Preset MF distance
2 A2 MF Assist
A3
MF Clutch
A4
B Focus Ring
C1 Bulb/Time Focusing
C2 Reset Lens
D1

Back

180 EN

2

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

3

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

[Off]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.
• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.

Operative
On
On
Set

Customizing the Fn Lever
MENU

G

M

(K Fn Lever Function)[K Fn Lever Function]

Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and rear dials or to recall
focus settings. It can also be used to select movie mode.
This setting takes effect in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The
option selected using [n Fn Lever Function] in the n video menu take effect in n(movie) mode (P. 145).
Mode

Fn lever position 1

Fn lever position 2

The Fn lever function is turned off.

mode1

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1
and 2 conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 164).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode],[AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].

mode3

Sets the shooting mode selectedby the mode dial.

Switches to the movie mode.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Off

EN 181

Burst Shooting Options
MENU

G

N

(jL Settings/jH Settings)[jL Settings]/[jH Settings]

Adjust settings for sequential shooting modes, including the maximum frame advance
rate and number of shots per burst. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots isreached while the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for S (sequential low) and T(sequential high) modes.

jL Settings(sequential low
options)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for
S (sequential low), ♦S (anti-shock sequential low), and ♥S (silent
sequential low) modes. You can also adjust settings for q (Pro CaptureLow) mode (P. 75).
• S and ♦S modes:[Max fps]: 1–6 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• ♥S mode:[Max fps]: 1–10 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• q mode:[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

jH Settings(sequential highoptions)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for T(sequential high) and ♥T (silent sequential high) modes. You can also
adjust settings for p (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 75).
• T mode:[Max fps]: 5–10 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• ♥T mode:[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• p mode:[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
182 EN1

Highlight [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] in
G Custom Menu N and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
1 A1 S-AF Release Priority
2 A2 C-AF Release Priority

A3 jL
Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back

2

Highlight [j/♦j] (or, in the case of[jH Settings], [j]), [♥j], or [J] using FG
on the arrow pad and press the I button.
• The camera will display options for the selected item.

Set

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
1 A1 S-AF Release Priority
2 A2 C-AF Release Priority

A3 j
L Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back

Choose a setting for [Max fps].
• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

SetƆj

Max fpsFrame Count Limiter

Back

4

5

Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• This option will only be available if you selected [J] in
Step 2.
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• To disable pre-capture, select [0].

Choose the maximum number of shots per burst([Frame Count Limiter]).

Off
On

jƇj
Ɔj
J

10fps
Off

Set
J

Pre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter

8
Off

8
Back

Set

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

3

Off
On

Ɔj
Max fpsFrame Count Limiter

10fps
Off

• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button
is pressed all the way down, select [Off].
Back
Set• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlightthe current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots captured while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture
shooting)” (P. 74)• Press the Q button to save changes to settings.

6

Press the Q button.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.

EN 183

Reducing Flicker
MENU

G

N

(Flicker Reduction)[Flicker Reduction]

When shooting under fluorescent or other artificial workplace or outdoor lighting, you
may notice flicker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken at fast
shutter speeds. This item reduces these effects.
 Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV)
Reduce flicker under fluorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if flicker
makes the display difficult to view.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Auto

The camera detects and reduces flicker.

50Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 50 Hz.

60Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 60 Hz.

Off

Flicker reduction off.
• This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker Shooting](P. 185).

1Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
1 A1 S-AF Release Priority

A3 jL
Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back

2

Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

OffOn

2 A2 C-AF Release Priority

Set
Flicker Reduction

Anti-Flicker LV
Anti-Flicker Shooting

Auto
Off

• [Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.

Back

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

Auto
Automatically reduces flicker.

• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

Back

4

184 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

Set
Anti-Flicker LVSet Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)
You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under flickering light. When thisoption is enabled, the camera will detect the flicker frequency and adjust the timingof the shutter release accordingly. This feature applies to photos taken with themechanical shutter.

1

Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
1 A1 S-AF Release Priority
2 A2 C-AF Release Priority

A3 jL
Settings
A4
jH Settings
B
C1 Flicker Reduction
C2
D1

Back

2

Set

4

Flicker Reduction
Anti-Flicker LV
Anti-Flicker Shooting

Auto
Off

• [Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.

Back

3

Highlight [On] or [Off] using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.
• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

Set
Anti-Flicker ShootingOn

Effects of flicker such as uneven
exposures and colors will be
reduced. The shutter release time
lag may become longer.
Valid when using mechanical shutter.
Back

4

Set

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A u icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.

u iconMenu functions (Custom menus)

Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

Off
On

FLK

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:031023• This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent
modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
• The camera may be unable to detect flicker at some settings. Normal release timing will
be used if flicker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling flicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.

EN 185

(K Control Settings)

Choosing the control panel displays
MENU

G[K Control Settings]

P

Sets whether or not to display control panels for option selection in each shootingmode.
In each shooting mode, press the Q button to insert a check in the control panel you
want to display.

4

How to display control panels• Press the Q button while the control panel is displayed, then press the INFO button toswitch the display.
• Only control panels selected in the [K Control Settings] menu will be displayed.
INFO

Change Color Saturation

S-IS AUTO

INFO

Menu functions (Custom menus)

B

W Keep Warm Color o

4:3

Off

LF

Live Guide(P. 49)

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

30p

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4K

WB Auto

AUTO

WB
ISO
Auto

WB
AUTO

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

U

Live Control(P. 187)1023

Live SCP(P. 79)INFO

S-IS AUTO

INFO

WB
ISO
Auto

WB
AUTO

P/A/S/M/BP

W Keep Warm Color o

4:3

Off

LF

WB Auto

4K

AUTO

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

30p

P

U

Live Control(P. 187)

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Live SCP(P. 79)INFO

INFO

S-IS AUTO

INFO

ART

W Keep Warm Color o

4:3

Off

LF

WB Auto4K

Pop Art 1

AUTO

Art Menu(P. 55)

WB
ISO
Auto

WB
AUTO
ART
1
Effect
Off

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

ART 1
Effect Off

± 0.0

sRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

30p

4K

F

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

U

Live Control(P. 187)1023

Live SCP(P. 79)INFO

Portrait

INFO

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

SCN

W Keep Warm Color o

4:3

Off

LF

WB Auto4K

AUTO

Scene Menu
(P. 50)30p

ULive Control(P. 187)

INFO

WB
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0

NormalsRGB

S-IS AUTO
M-IS

F

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Live SCP(P. 79)INFO• For movie mode, set with [n Control Settings] of [n Display Settings] (P. 146).

186 EN Live control
S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

Settings

P

W Keep Warm Color o

4:3

Off

LF

WB Auto

4K

AUTO

30p

U

Functions

Available settingsn mode*............................................P. 147
Flash mode ...........................................P. 95
Flash intensity control ...........................P. 97
Metering mode......................................P. 82
AF mode*..............................................P. 80
ISO sensitivity* ...............................P. 70, 80
Face priority* ........................................P. 67
Movie sound record*...........................P. 150* Available in movie mode
• Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.
• When the controls in [KControl Settings] is set to [Live Control], you can use live control
even in B, P, A, S, M, B, ART, SCN modes (P. 166).

1

Press the Q button to display the live control.

2

Use FG to move the cursor to the desired function, then use HI to selectit and press the Q button.

• Press the Q button again to hide live control.

4Menu functions (Custom menus)

Image stabilizer* ...................................P. 86
Picture mode* ...............................P. 98, 129
White balance* .....................................P. 83
Sequential shooting/Self-timer........P. 71, 87
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 87
KK (image quality)*
Still image .......................................P. 88
Movie ..............................................P. 89• The setting is confirmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.

EN 187

Adding information displays
MENU

G(G/Info Settings)[G/Info Settings]

P

q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to
not show displays that appear at the default setting.

4

15

1x

15

Shadow Highlight

Histogram display

Highlight & Shadow
display

15

16

Light box display

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below thelower limit in blue. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 168)
Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press the Q button to select the base image.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use the front dial to select an image and press
the Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left
can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frameand press the Q.
• To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. Press the ISO button and then FGHI toscroll the zoomed-in area, and rotate the front dial to select between images.
ISO

2x

ISO

2x

2x

53

54

ISO

qa Info (Magnified playback information display)
The magnified playback information displays can be set with [qa Info]. If [a] (Magnify)
is assigned to a button with Button Function (P. 107) in advance, the set displays can beswitched by repeatedly pressing the a button during playback. You can also choose to notshow displays that appear at the default setting.
a

L F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

a

2x

20

a

2x

2x

20

a

188 ENLV-Info (Shooting information displays)
To add highlights and shadows to the [LV-Info] display, press I on the arrow pad to placea check next to [Custom1] or [Custom2]. The added displays are displayed by repeatedlypressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to not show displays thatappear at the default setting.
G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set to notdisplay the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings]. Screens with acheck can be selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.

q

q

4

20

Single-frame
playbackp

2019.12.01 12:30:00

20

4 frames

p

20

Sun

Mon

25

26

1

Q

Tue

27

Wed

Thu

28

29

Fri

q

Sat

30

31

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

1

2

Calendar displayp

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio
G

20

9, 25, or 100 frames

Index display

2019.12MENU

2019.12.01 12:30:00

Q(qa Default Setting)[qa Default Setting]Menu functions (Custom menus)

2019.12.01 12:30:00

L F 100-0020

2019.12.01 12:30:00

Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
Recently

Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.

Equally Value

Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A
monitor.

×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14

Choose the starting zoom ratio.

icon appears in the

EN 189Selfie Assist
MENU

G(Selfie Assist)
R[Selfie Assist]

When the monitor is in the selfie position, you can display a convenient touch menu.

1
2

Select [On] for [Selfie Assist] in Custom Menu R.
Turn the monitor towards you.

S-AF
ISO-A
200

4
1:02:03

1023

Menu functions (Custom menus)
190 EN

Self portrait menu

• The self portrait menu is displayed in the monitor.
One touche-Portrait

Turning this on makes skin look smooth and translucent.
Valid only during AUTO mode (B).

C Touch shutter

When the icon is tapped, the shutter is released about
1 second later.

A

D

One touch custom
self-timer

Shoot 3 frames using the self-timer. You can set the numberof times the shutter is released and the interval between
each release using [Custom Self-timer] (P. 71, 87).

3

Frame the shot.

4

Tap C to take the picture.

• Be careful that your fingers or the camera
strap do not obstruct the lens.

• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.
• You can also shoot by tapping the subject displayed in the monitor, or by pressing the
shutter button.

Viewing camera images on TV
MENU

G

S

(HDMI)[HDMI]

Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on yourTV. This function is available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using
an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen.
HDMI connector (type D)
HDMI cable(Connect to the HDMI connector
on the TV.)4

• When an HDMI cable is connected, images are displayed on both the television and thecamera monitor. Information is displayed on the television screen only.
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C4K

C4K via HDMI output.

4K

Priority is given to 4K HDMI output.

1080p

Priority is given to 1080p HDMI output.

720p

Priority is given to 720p HDMI output.

480p/576p

480p/576p HDMI output.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Type A

Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.

• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage thecamera.
• HDMI output is disabled while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• When [Record Mode] is selected for [Output Mode] (P. 146), movies will be output at theresolution selected during recording. The images cannot be displayed on the connected
TV if the TV does not support the record mode.
• 1080p output will be used in place of [4K] or [C4K] while the camera is being used to takephotographs.

Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g [HDMI] (P. 168)
The camera monitor turns off.
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display bypressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.

EN 191

Live Bulb Update Frequency
MENU

G

U

(Live Bulb)[Live Bulb]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live bulb
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.

• [Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [BULB] or[LIVE BULB] photography.

Live Time Update Frequency

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
192 ENMENU

GU(Live Time)[Live Time]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live time
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.

• [Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [TIME] or[LIVE TIME] photography.

Choosing the Shutter Speed
MENU

G

U

(Composite Settings)[Composite Settings]

The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can bechosen in advance using the menus.

1

Highlight [Composite Settings] in G Custom Menu
U and press the Q button.

E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
1 D2 Bulb/Time Timer
2 D3 Bulb/Time Monitor
D4Live Bulb
E1
E2 Live Time
E3 Composite Settings
F KFlicker Scan
G

Back

2

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

8min
-7
Off
0.5secOff
Set

Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

Back

3

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• G Custom Menu U will be displayed.

• Live composite photography can continue for up to three hours.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page P. 47 for more
information on composite photography.
• [Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button in[LIVE COMP] mode.

Set

Menu functions (Custom menus)• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

4

EN 193

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting
MENU

G

U

(K Flicker Scan)[K Flicker Scan]

Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro
Capture shooting.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1

Choose shooting and drive modes.

2

Highlight [K Flicker Scan] in G Custom Menu U
and press the Q button.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• Choose shooting mode S or M.
• Choose one of the following drive modes:- Silent mode (♥o, ♥S, ♥T, ♥X, ♥Z, or ♥c)- High Res Shot (h)- Pro Capture (q or p)
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
1 D2 Bulb/Time Timer

8min
-7
Off
0.5sec2 D3 Bulb/Time Monitor

D4Live Bulb
E1
E2 Live Time
E3 Composite Settings
F KFlicker Scan
G

Off

Back

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Set
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p

1 D2 Bulb/Time Timer
2 D3 Bulb/Time Monitor

D4Live Bulb
E1
E2 Live Time
E3 Composite Settings
F KFlicker Scan
G

• The camera will return to the previous menu.

Back

4

8min
-7
Off
0.5sec
Off
On

Off
Set

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display. A P
icon will be displayed.
S

250.0

P

P icon194 EN

5

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.

6

Take pictures once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction.

• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the P icon will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker
scan display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scandisplay.

• [K Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable flicker scan. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)

Shutter speeds when the flash fires
MENU

G

W

(#X-Sync./#Slow Limit)[#X-Sync.]/[#Slow Limit]

You can set shutter speed conditions for when the flash fires.
Shooting
mode
P
A
S
M

Flash firing shutter speed
The camera automatically sets the
shutter speed.
The set shutter speed

Upper limit[#X-Sync.]
setting

Lower limit[#Slow Limit]
setting*
No lower limit

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)%* Extends up to 60 seconds when slow synchronization is set.

EN 195

Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates(K Set)MENUGX[K Set]You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.
Image size
NameSF
(Super Fine)

F(Fine)N(Normal)5184×3888*

YSF*

YF*

YN*

XSF

XF

XN*

WSF

WF

WN

Y (Large)

4Compression rate

Pixel Count

3200×2400*

X (Middle)

1920×1440

Menu functions (Custom menus)

1280×960

W (Small)

1024×768

Application

Select for the printsize
For small prints anduse on a website* Default

Saving lens info
MENU

G

Y

(Lens Info Settings)[Lens Info Settings]

The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro
Four Thirds or Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length
used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features.

1
2

Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in Custom Menu Y.

3
4
5

Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].

Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight[END] and press the Q button.
Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].
Select [Set] and press the Q button.

• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicatedby v. Highlight a lens with a v icon and press the Q button.

%• [Lens Info Settings] can be assigned to a button. The button can then be used to recall
lens info, for example after lenses are exchanged. g [Button Function] (P. 107)196 EN

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder
MENU

G

a

(EVF Style)[EVF Style]

Style 1/2: Similar to film camera viewfinder displays.
Style 3: The same as the monitor display.
S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200P

1:02:031023

250 F5.6 0.0

Style 1/ Style 2

04

1:02:031023

Style 3

1 2

f e

C
AEL

250 F5.6 +2.0

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
-3
Sh
Sh-3

1:02:03

3 4

5

C
AEL

250 F5.6 +2.0

d

c

C
AEL

250 F5.6 +2.0

b

a

0

1023

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
-3
Sh
Sh-3

1:02:03

9 8 7

6

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
-3
Sh
Sh-3

1:02:03

1023

1023

g

1 Battery check
j: Ready for use.
k: Low battery
l: Battery is running low.
m: Charging required.
2 z ..................................................P. 108
3 Shooting mode......................... P. 34 –59
4 Assign to Custom Mode..........P. 57, 128
5 Available recording time ...............P. 242
6 Number of storable still pictures ...P. 241
7 ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
8 White balance .................................P. 83
9 Highlight&Shadow Control ............P. 106

Menu functions (Custom menus)

 Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder(Style 1/Style 2)

0 Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 97
Bottom: Exposure compensation
indicator ..........................................P. 64
a Exposure compensation value........P. 64
b Aperture value ........................ P. 37 – 43
c Shutter speed ..........................P. 37 – 43
d AE Lock u ...........................P. 70, 175
e AF confirmation mark......................P. 35
f Flash (blinks: charging in progress)........................................................P. 93
g Level gauge (displayed by pressing the
shutter button down halfway)

EN 197

Correcting Fisheye Distortion
MENU

G

b

(Fisheye Compensation)[Fisheye Compensation]

Correct distortion caused by fisheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures
taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from threedifferent levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken
under water.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
• This option is only available with compatible fisheye lenses.
As of July 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO.

4

Angle

When fisheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped toeliminate blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

j/i Correction

Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].

1J1. KUtility

Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] in G Custom
Menu b and press the Q button.

1 H1 Pixel Mapping
2 H2 Press-and-hold TimeI
Level Adjust
J1
J2 Touchscreen Settings

Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensation

Back

2

Set
J1. KUtility

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

1 H1 Pixel Mapping
2 H2 Press-and-hold TimeI
Level Adjust
J1
J2 Touchscreen Settings• [Angle] and [j/i Correction] will be displayed.

On
Menu Recall
RecallFisheye Compensation Off Off
On

Back

3

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Off]for [j/i Correction].
• [Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed.

4

On
RecallOff

Set
Fisheye Compensation

Angle
j/i Correction

1
Off

Back

Set

Press the Q button repeatedly to exit to the custom menu.
• After confirming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye Compensation], press the MENU
button to exit the menus.
Fisheye compensation• When fisheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.
1

S-IS AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A
200

LF
4K

30p

P

198 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:031023

5

Take pictures.

• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
• Focus peaking is not available in the fisheye compensation display.
• AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF] and[C-AF+TR] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter picture modes, the custom self-timer,and High Res Shot.

%

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable fisheye correction. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)

EN 1995Connecting the camera to asmartphone

Use the camera’s wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and Bluetooth® features to connect to asmartphone, where you can use the dedicated app to enhancement your enjoyment of
the camera both before and after shooting. Once a connection has been established,
you can download and take pictures remotely and add GPS tags to the images on thecamera.
• Operation is not guaranteed on all smartphones.

Things you can do with the specified app, OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share)

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
200 EN• Download images from the camera to the smartphone
You can load images in the camera to a smartphone.
You can also use the smartphone to select images for download from the camera.
• Remote shooting from a smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera and shoot using a smartphone.

For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/
Things you can do with the specified app, Olympus Image Palette (OI.Palette)• Beautiful image processing
Use intuitive controls to apply impressive effects to images downloaded to yoursmartphone.

For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/Things you can do with the specified app, OLYMPUS Image Track (OI.Track)• Addition of GPS tags to camera images
You can add GPS tags to images simply by transferring the GPS log saved on thesmartphone to the camera.

For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/• Before using the wireless LAN function, read “Using the wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions” (P. 249).
• Olympus accepts no responsibility for violations of local regulations governing wirelesscommunications caused by the use of the camera’s wireless LAN/Bluetooth® features
outside the country or region of purchase.
• As with any wireless communication, there is always a risk of interception by a third party.
Keep this mind when using wireless LAN.
• The wireless LAN function on the camera cannot be used to connect to a home or publicaccess point.
• The transceiver antenna is located inside the grip. Keep the antenna away from metal
objects whenever possible.
• Depending on the composition of the container or the objects it contains, the camera may
be unable to connect to a smartphone when placed inside a bag or other container.
• During wireless LAN connection, the battery will run down faster. If the battery is runninglow, the connection may be lost during a transfer.
• Connection may be difficult or slow in proximity to devices that generate magnetic fields,
static electricity or radio waves, such as near microwaves, cordless telephone.
• Wireless LAN cannot be used when the memory card write-protect switch is in the “LOCK”
position.

Adjusting Settings for Connection to a Smartphone
Start the OI.Share App installed on your smartphone.

1

Select [Device Connection] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.

2

Follow the on-screen guide to adjust Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings.

• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.
• The Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID and password, and a QR
code are displayed in the monitor.
Connection Setup

Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password

QR code: xxxxxxxxxxx
Bluetooth Name
Bluetooth Passcode : 000000
Wi-Fi SSID
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
Wi-Fi Password: 00000000

Disconnect

3

Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OI.Share display.

4

Follow the on-screen instructions in OI.Share to scan the QR code and adjust
connection settings.

• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.

• If you are unable to scan the QR code, follow the on-screen instructions in OI.Shareto adjust settings manually.
- Bluetooth: To connect, select the local name and enter the passcode displayed in
the camera monitor into the Bluetooth settings dialog in OI.Share.
- Wi-Fi:Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera into the Wi-Fi
settings dialog displayed by OI.Share.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection is established.

5

To end the connection, press MENU on the camera or tap [Disconnect] on
the monitor screen.
• You can also turn the camera off and end the connection from OI.Share.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone

Bluetooth local nameBluetooth Passcode3/3

Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Shareapp.

EN 201

Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off
You can choose whether the camera will maintain a wireless connection to thesmartphone when off.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
202 EN

1

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d setup menu and press the Q
button.

23Highlight [Power-off Standby] and press I.
Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.

SelectWhen you turn the camera off, you will be prompted to choose whether tomaintain the wireless connection to the smartphone.

Off

Turning the camera off terminates the wireless connection to the smartphone.

On

When the camera is turned off, the connection to the smartphone remains
active and the smartphone can still be used to download or view the pictureson the camera.

 “Select”
When [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], aconfirmation dialog will be displayed before the camera
turns off if all the following conditions are met:
• [On] is selected for [Availability]• The camera is currently connected with a smartphone(P. 201)• The memory card is correctly inserted

Power-off Standby
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?
Yes
No

Yes

Turn the camera off but leave the wireless smartphone connection active.

No

Turn the camera off and terminate the wireless smartphone connection.

Set• If no operations are performed about a minute after the confirmation dialog is displayed,
the camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.

$• If left active, the wireless connection will automatically terminate if:- the connection remains inactive for 12 hours- the memory card is removed- the battery is replaced- a charging error occurs during on-board battery charging
The connection can be restored by turning the camera on.
• Note that if [On] is selected for [Power-off Standby], camera may not turn on immediately
when the ON/OFF lever is rotated to ON.

Transferring images to a smartphone
You can select images in the camera and load them to a smartphone. You can also use
the camera to select images you want to share in advance. g “Selecting Pictures for
Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 119)1Start [Device Connection] on the camera (P. 201).
• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.
• Once configured for connection, the camera will connect
automatically.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection is established.
S-AF
ISO-A
200

5
2

Launch OI.Share and tap the Image Transfer button.

3

Select the pictures you want to transfer and tap the Save button.

1:02:03

1023• The images in the camera are displayed in a list.
• When saving is completed, you can turn off the camera from the smartphone.

$• If the following options are selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings] in the camera d (setup)
menu, you can download pictures to the smartphone as described in Steps 2 and 3,
above, even when the camera is off:
- [Availability]: [On]- [Power-off standby]: [On]Connecting the camera to a smartphone

250 F5.6

EN 203

Automatically uploading images while the camera is off
To configure the camera to automatically upload images to a smartphone while off:
• Mark images for sharing (P. 119)
• Enable power-off standby (P. 202)
• If you are using an iOS device, launch OI.Share$• Auto upload is not available if you are connected via a router (for example, a home
network), in which case you will need to transfer pictures using OI.Share.
• Some smartphones may terminate upload on entering sleep mode. Keep the smartphoneawake while upload is in progress.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
204 EN

Shooting remotely with a smartphone
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone.

1

Start [Device Connection] on the camera.

2
3

Launch OI.Share and tap the Remote button.

• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.

Tap the shutter button to shoot.
• The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

• Available shooting options are partially limited.

Adding position information to images
You can add GPS tags to images that were taken while the GPS log was saving bytransferring the GPS log saved on the smartphone to the camera.

1

Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OI.Track on the smartphone tobegin saving the GPS log.
• Before starting a GPS track log, you will need to connect once via OI.Track andsynchronize the clock.
• You can use the phone or other apps while the GPS log is saving. Do not terminate
OI.Track.

Once you have finished taking pictures with the camera, end tracking in
OI.Share.

3

Tap the G icon in the camera monitor to connect to the smartphone.

4

Upload the GPS log to the camera using OI.Track.

• You can also connect by selecting [Device Connection] in the q playback menu.
• The GPS log will be used to add location data to any pictures taken after you
launched OI.Track in Step 1.
• g is displayed on images to which position information has been added.

• Addition of location information can only be used with smartphones that have a GPSfunction.
• Position information cannot be added to movies.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone2

EN 205

Resetting Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® settings
To restore [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] to default values:

1

Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [Reset Settings] and press I.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The following settings will be reset:
OptionAvailability

Default
On

5

Connection Password― (generated randomly) *Power-off Standby

Off *Connecting the camera to a smartphone* The connection to the smartphone will also be reset (deactivated).

206 EN

Changing the password
To change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth passwords:

1

Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [Connection Password] and press I.
Follow the operation guide and press the R button.
• A new password will be set.

• Both the Wi-Fi connection password and Bluetooth connection passcode can bechanged.
• Reconnect to the smartphone after changing passwords. g “Adjusting Settings forConnection to a Smartphone” (P. 201)

Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®
To disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®:1

Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [Availability] and press I.
Select [Off] and press the Q button.

$• To disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® only while the camera is off, select [Off] for [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings for When the Camera
Is Off” (P. 202)

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
EN 207

6 Connecting the camera to a computer
Connecting the camera to a computer

Smaller terminal

Micro-USB connector

6

USB port

USB cable

Connecting the camera to a computer• If nothing is displayed on the camera screen even after connecting the camera to thecomputer, the battery may be exhausted. Use a full-charged battery.
• The camera should prompt you to choose a host when turned on. If it does not, select[Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 168) in the camera custom menus.

Copying pictures to a computer
The following operating systems are compatible with the USB connection:
Windows: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Mac:
OS X versions 10.9 – 10.11, macOS versions v10.12 – v10.14

1

Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Press FG to select [Storage]. Press the Q
button.

• The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For details, refer to yourcomputer’s manual.
• The selection screen for the USB connection is displayed.
USB
Storage
MTP
PCM Recorder
Exit

Set

4

208 ENThe computer recognizes the camera as a new device.

• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer isequipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers• Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer.
• If the dialog shown in Step 3 is not displayed when the camera is connected to acomputer, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 168) in the camera custom menus.

Installing the PC software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to thecomputer via USB.
Olympus Workspace
This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos and movies
recorded with the camera. It can also be used to update the camera firmware. The software
can be downloaded from the website below. Be prepared to provide the camera serial
number when downloading the software.

6
Connecting the camera to a computer

https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/

EN 209

7 Cautions
Battery and charger

7
Cautions
210 EN• The camera uses a single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other thangenuine OLYMPUS batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shootingmode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer.
• Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using theprovided charger before use.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,potentially rendering them unusable.
• The normal charging time using the supplied charger is approximately 3 hours and
30 minutes (estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifically designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifically designated for use with the supplied charger.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 248) in the
instruction manual.

Using your charger abroad• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.

Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) canbe used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch tothe unlock position enable writing.

LOCK

Cautions• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card ordeleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Access to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.

7

EN 211Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system andbearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM Systemlenses. The optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mounton the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter fromgetting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through thelens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.

7

 Lens and camera combinations
Lens

Cautions

Micro Four Thirds system
lens
Four Thirds system lensCameraMicro Four Thirds
system camera

OM System lenses*1 AF is not operational when recording movies.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.

212 EN

Attachment

AF

Metering

Yes

Yes

Yes

Attachment possible
with mount adapter

Yes*1

Yes

No

Yes*2

MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used toswitch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

AF/MF

MF

AF/MF

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

1
2
0.5

16

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11

5 3 ∞ mm

Focus distances visible

16

Focus ringMF

7
Cautions• Selecting [MF] or [PreMF] for focus mode on the camera disables autofocus even when
the focus ring is in the AF/MF position.

EN 213

Optional Accessories
Grip (ECG-5)
The grip helps you keep the camera steady when using large lenses.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the grip.
 Part names
Shutter button
Front dial

Connector cap

Removal knob

7
Cautions Attaching the Grip
Before attaching the grip, remove theconnector cover (a) from the bottom of thecamera and the connector cap (b) fromthe ECG-5. Once attached, make sure theECG-5 removal knob is tightly secured. Be
sure to replace the connector cover on thecamera when the ECG-5 is not in use.

a

b

a

Store the connector cover (a) in the ECG-5

 Main Specifications (ECG-5)
Dimensions

Approx. 128.4 mm (W) × 76 mm (H) × 60.2 mm (D)(5.1" × 3.0" × 2.4")

WeightApprox. 121 g (4.3 oz.) (excluding battery and terminal cap)

Splash resistance(when attached to camera)

Type

Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1

• Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.

214 EN

Designated External Flash Units
When using a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose the flash
mode using camera controls and take pictures with the flash. See the documentation
provided with the flash unit for information on flash features and their use.
Choose a flash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of flash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe orconnected using a cable (available separately) and flash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless flash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which flash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fitted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use ofunits that do not otherwise support radio flash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of optical signals. The
flash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 97).

Flash unit

Supported flash control
modes

GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100)

Supported wirelesssystems

FL-700WR

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL

GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)

CMD, #CMD, RCV,X-RCV, RC

GN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

GN 36 (42.5/85 mm * )GN 20 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

GN 8.5

RC *2

FL-900R
FL-600R
STF-8

TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUAL
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2

1

Cautions Features Available with Compatible Flash Units

7*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide flash coverage (figures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

EN 215

Wireless remote control flash photography
Wireless flash photography is available with compatible flash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote flash units are controlled via a unit mounted
on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for the camera-mounted
unit and units in up to three other groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote flash units.
 Enabling RC Mode1

Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired.

2

Select [On] for [#RC Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 127), and press the
Q button.

• Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external flash unit.

• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• An q icon will be displayed.

q iconRC

S-IS AUTO

7

S-AF
ISO-A
200

Cautions

LF
4K

30p

P

3

Press the Q button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayedby pressing the INFO button. The display will change
each time the INFO button is pressed.

250 F5.6 0.0

01:02:031023

A ModeTTL
ManualOff
TTL

P

250 F5.6

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

LO
1

1:02:031023

RC mode super control panel

216 EN

4

Adjust flash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the rear dial to choose
settings.
Flash mode

Flash control mode
A ModeTTL
Manual
Off
TTL

Group

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

Optical signal strengthLO
1

ChannelFlash compensation
P

1:02:03

1023

Group

Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units inthe selected group. Choose Q to adjust settings for the unit
mounted on the camera.

Flash control mode

Choose a flash mode.

Flash compensation

Adjust flash output. When [Manual] is selected for flash mode,
you can a value for manual flash output.

Optical signal
strength

Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the flash units. Choose [HI] if you have placed flash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.

Flash mode/
flash level

Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.

ChannelChoose the channel used for flash control. Change thechannel if you find that other light sources in the area areinterfering with remote flash control.

7
Cautions

5

250 F5.6

Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL-LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.

 Positioning Remote Flash Units

1

Set the wireless RC flash units to RC mode.

2

Position the flash units.

3

Take pictures after confirming that the remote units and the unit on thecamera are charged.

• After turning compatible flash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC
mode.
• Choose a group for each of the compatible flash units using flash controls and matchthe channel to that selected with the camera.
• Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.

EN 217

 Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The flash control range varies with the typeof flash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
30°
60°

30°

7m
50°
100°

7
Cautions
218 EN

50°5m• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 flash units.
• Wireless flash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera.
This can be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera flash, for example byusing a diffuser.

Other external flash units
Note the following when using a third-party flash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:• Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 24 V to the X-contact will
damage the camera.
• Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifications
may damage the camera.
• Set the Shooting mode to M, set the shutter speed to a value no higher than flash
synchronous speed, and set ISO sensitivity to a setting other than [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted byadjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.

Principal Accessories
 Remote cable (RM-CB2)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. Connect the cable to the camera remote cable terminal(P. 14).
 Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can beused.
 Eyecup (EP-16)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.
Removal7
Cautions

2
1

EN 219System chart

Power Supply

Viewfinder

BLS-50

BCS-5

F-5AC

EP-16

Lithium-ion battery

Lithium-ion Charger

USB-AC Adapter

EyecupRemoteOperation
RM-CB2
Remote Cable

7
Cautions

Grip
ECG-5
Grip

Case / Strap

Shoulder Strap /Camera Case

Connection
Cable

USB Cable /HDMI Cable *1

Microphone

SoftwareMemory Card

SD/SDHC/
SDXC

Olympus Workspace
Digital Photo Managing Software: E-M5 Mark 3 compatible products: Commercially available products

For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit the OLYMPUS website fordetails.
*3 Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on compatible lenses.

220 EN

Converter
Lens*3

Lens

FCON-P01

Micro Four Thirds system lenses

Fisheye

WCON-P01
Wide

MCON-P01
Macro

Four Thirds systemlenses

MMF-2/MMF-3*2
Four Thirds Adapter

MCON-P02
Macro

7
Cautions

Flash

FL-LM3FL-900R

FL-700WR

Electronic FlashElectronic FlashElectronic Flash

STF-8

FC-WR

FR-WR

Macro Flash

Wireless radiowave
commander

Wireless radiowave receiver

EN 221

8

Information
Cleaning and storing the camera

Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.

Exterior:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.

Monitor:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.

Lens:• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently witha lens cleaning paper.

8
Information
222 EN

Storage• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Storethe camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect thecamera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.

Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on theimage pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when thecamera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, whichchecks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reductionis activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. After using the monitor or taking continuous
shots, wait for at least one minute before using the pixel mapping function to ensurethat it operates correctly.

1
2

In Custom Menu b, select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 174).
Press I, then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is finished, the menu is restored.

• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.

8
Information
EN 223

Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged• Charge the battery with the charger.

The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it byputting it in your pocket for a while.

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically• If power saving is enabled, the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are
performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit the sleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if nooperations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 174)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,the camera will turn off automatically. g [Auto Power Off] (P. 174)

8

The flash is charging

Information• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking tostop, then press the shutter button.

Unable to focus• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are notsuited to autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase thedistance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from thecamera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confirmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast

Excessively bright
light in center of frame

Subjects at different
distances

Fast-moving subject

AF confirmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.

224 EN

Subject not inside
AF areaNoise reduction is activated• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear inimages. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169)

The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 130), [Image Aspect] (P. 87), and group target (P. 65) settings.

The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 27)

The battery has been removed from the camera• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera isleft without the battery for approximately 1 day. The settings will be canceled more quickly
if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed. Before
taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct.

Set functions are restored to their factory default settings

Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This isdue to a phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a lightsource is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the lightsource. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 212)

8
Information

Options selected in AUTO (B) or SCN mode are reset when the mode dial is rotated toanother setting or the camera is turned off. In addition, selecting C mode restores custom
mode settings.

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions” (P. 223)

Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combinations of [T] (P. 71) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169), etc.

EN 225

The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:movie recording (P. 58), silent mode (P. 74), Pro Capture shooting (P. 74), High Res
Shot (P. 76), focus bracketing (P. 134), focus stacking (P. 134)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.

Lines appear in photographs
The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to flicker andother phenomena associated with fluorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 58), silent mode (P. 74), Pro Capture shooting (P. 74), High Res
Shot (P. 76), focus bracketing (P. 134), focus stacking (P. 134)
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce flicker using
flicker scan. g [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194), [n Flicker Scan] (P. 148)

8
Information
226 ENError codes
Monitor indication

Possible cause

Corrective action

The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized.

Insert a card. Or reinsert thecard properly.

There is a problem with thecard.

Insert the card again. If the
problem persists, format thecard.
If the card cannot be formatted,
it cannot be used.

Writing to the card isprohibited.

The card write-protect switch is
set to the “LOCK” side. Release
the switch (P. 211).

No Card

Card Error

Write Protect

The card is full. No morepictures can be taken or no
more information such as print
reservation can be recorded.
Card Full

Picture Error

The Image Cannot Be
EditedY/M/D

There are no pictures on thecard.

The card contains no pictures.
Record pictures and play back.

The selected picture cannot be
displayed for playback due toa problem with this picture. Or
the picture cannot be used forplayback on this camera.

Use image processing software
to view the picture on a PC.
If that cannot be done, theimage file is damaged.

Pictures taken with anothercamera cannot be edited on
this camera.

Use image processing softwareto edit the picture.

The clock is not set.

Set the clock (P. 27).

8
Information

No Picture

There is no space in the cardand print reservation or newimages cannot be recorded.

Replace the card or erase
unwanted pictures.
Before erasing, download
important images to a PC.

EN 227

Monitor indication

Possible causemInternal camera
temperature is too high.
Please wait for coolingbefore camera use.

Corrective action
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.

The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due tosequential shooting.

Wait a moment for the camera
to turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperatureof the camera to cool before
resuming operations.

The battery is drained.

Charge the battery.

The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer,
HDMI display, or other device.

Reconnect the camera.

Battery Empty

No Connection

8
Information
228 ENThe lens is locked.
Please extend the lens.

The lens of the retractable lensExtend the lens.
stays retracted.

Please check the statusof a lens.

An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and thelens.

Turn off the camera, check theconnection with the lens, andturn the power on again.

Default Settings*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
Shooting
mode
P/A/S/M/B

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

Auto
#
±0
#FULL (flash set to[#MANUAL])
S-IS AUTO
Auto ([On] selected for[W Keep Warm Color])±0±05400K ([CWB] selected for[WB])
Center/single
S-AF
Face & Eye Priority Onop
YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)
















80
94
97
95










86
83









―
―
―

85

















―




65
80
67
87
82
88



















―
―
―
―
―

89
98
101
101
101
102
104







103







104













87
105
106







150

Item
ISO
Flash Modex
Manual ValueK Image Stabilizer
WB
WB compensation A
WB compensation G
KelvinnK
Picture Mode
Sharpness
Contrast
Saturation
Gradation
EffectColor Filter

Monochrome Color

AspectColor Space
Highlight&Shadow
Control
Movie R

Natural±0±0±0Gradation Normal―([i-Enhance] selected for[Picture Mode]: 3Standard)―([Monochrome] selected for[Picture Mode]: N:None)―([Monochrome] selected for[Picture Mode]: N:Normal)
4:3
sRGB
f (±0)
On

8
Information

AF Area
K AF Mode
IFace Priority
j/Y
Metering
KK

83

EN 229

Shootingmoden (movie)

ISO

Flash Modexn Image Stabilizer
WB
WB compensation A
WB compensation G
Kelvin
AF Arean AF Mode
IFace Priority
Metering
nK
Picture Mode
Sharpness
Contrast
Saturation
Gradation
Aspect8
Information
RC mode230 EN

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

[P], [A], or [S] selected for[n Mode]: Auto (fixed)[M] selected for [n Mode]:200
Flash Off (fixed)±0 (fixed)







80

―
―



―
―



―
―



―
―
86
83









―
―
―

85
83




―






―




―






―



―
―


―
―
―
―
―

65
80
67
―
89
98
101
101
101
102
―

―


―


―


―
106

P
On
TTL
Off
Off
Off
±0 (TTL, Auto)
1/1 (Manual)# (Normal)
Low

―





















―










147
150
216

1







Item

Color Space
Highlight&Shadow
Controln ModeMovie RQA group A
QB group B
QC group C
Q camera flash
Flash compensation
Flash level#/FP
a optical signal
strength
ChannelM-IS1
Auto ([On] selected for[W Keep Warm Color])±0±05400K ([CWB] selected for[WB])
Center; Small Target
C-AF
Face & Eye Priority On
p (fixed)
Natural±0±0±0Gradation Normal
16:9 (fixed)
C4K selected for [nK]:17:9sRGB (fixed)
f (±0)

K Shooting Menu
Tab

W

Default―
Shooting mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Recall from Custom Mode―
Picture ModeC NaturalKK
YF (High Res
Shot: IF+RAW)
Image Aspect
4:3
Digital Tele-converter
Off
―
j/Y/i
j/Y
o
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Off
Number of Frames
99
Start Waiting Time
00:00:01
Interval Length
00:00:01
Time Lapse Movie
Off
Movie
Movie
FullHD
Settings Resolution
Frame Rate 10fps
BracketingOff
AE BKT
3f 1.0EVWB BKT
A– B
Off
G– M
FL BKT
OffISO BKT
OffART BKT
Off
Focus BKT
Off
Focus Stacking
Off
Set number of shots99
Set focus differential
5
0 sec#Charge Time
HDR
OffMultiple
Number of Frames
Off
Exposure
Auto Gain
Off
OverlayOff
Keystone Comp.
Off

g
127,
128

*1
―

*2


*3
―







 98, 129
 88, 129





―













87
130
71
131

8
132,
132,
133,
134









―





―



137
139







141

Information

X

Function
Reset / Custom Reset
Modes
Assign to Custom Mode

EN 231Tab

X

Function
Anti-Shock r/ Anti-Shock r
Silent s
Silent s
Noise Reduction s
Silent s Mode Settings
8
AF IlluminatorFlash ModeHigh Res Shot High Res Shot
#Charge Time
#RC Mode

Defaultr 0 secs 0 secOff―
Not Allow
Not Allow
Not Allow
h0 sec
0 sec
Off

g
142

*1


*2


*3
―





―





―

143







143,
216

Default
P
Off
MOVn4K 30p
Standard
Off
C-AF
M-IS1

*1
―







*2








ISO
F
R REC
AEL/AFL
Off

―
―
―
―
―







*3
g
―
147

148

149

144
―
144
 80, 86,
144

145
―
―
―
―
―

u
a
Direct Function
WB
Electronic Zoom
AF Stop
k: F
j: F
k: F
j: FNo.
k: F
j: Shutter
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
mode2w
Normal

―
―
―





―
―
―

―
―
―





―
―
―

―



―

―



―

―



―

―
―
―





―
―
―

n Video Menu
Tab

n

8
Information

Functionn Mode Settings n Moden Flicker Scann SpecificationnK
Settings
n Noise Filter
n Picture Moden AF/IS Settings n AF Moden Image Stabilizer
n Button/Dial/Lever
K Button Function
n ButtonFunction
F Button Function
R Function
t Function
jY Button
Functionu Function
z Functiond Function
E Function
D Functionl Functionn Dial Function PASMn Fn Lever Functionn Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom Speed

232 ENTabnFunctionn Display Settingsn Control Settings

Default

*2

*3

―



―

―



―

―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

















―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

―







―
―
―

146

*1

―

*2

―

*3

―

―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―

g
153
153
154
156
122
155
120
158
158
201

150

q Playback Menu
TabqFunctionR
Edit

Default
On

Sel. Image

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Device Connection

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
Movie Edit
R

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

8
Information

Live Control,
Live SCP
Custom1 (all on
n Info Settings
except for Movie
Effect)Time CodeTime Code Mode
Drop Frame
Settings
Count Up
Rec RunStarting Time
0:00:00
On
Movie R
Recording±0
Built-in R
Volume±0
MIC R
On
R Volume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Off
Recording Rate
48kHz/16bit
On
R Plug-in PowerPCM Recorder
Camera Rec. Volume Operative
R LinkSlate Tone
Off
Off
Synchronized R
Rec.
Output Mode
Monitor Moden HDMI Output
REC Bit
OffTime Code
On

g
146

*1

EN 233

d Setup Menu
TabdFunction
Card Setup
XWs
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Availability
Settings
Connection Password
Power-off Standby
Reset Settings
Firmware

Default――
Englishj±0, k±0, Natural
0.5 sec
On
―
Off
―
―

*1
―
―
―


―
―
―
―
―

*2
―
―
―



―

―
―

*3
g
―
160
―
27
― 29, 159
―
159
―
159
―
207
―
206
―
202
―
206
―
159

Default

*1

*2

*3







 80, 161

161,
175





















































162





163



163
― 67, 163

163

G Custom Menu
Tab

G

8
Information

Function
AF/MF
J K AF mode
K AEL/AFL S-AF
C-AF
MF
AF Scanner
K C-AF Sensitivity
K C-AF Center Start
K C-AF Center Priority
K NMode Settings
AF Area Pointer
AF Targeting Pad
N Set Home
N Custom Settingskj
A
B
L AF Limiter
Distance settings
Release Priority
AF Illuminator
IFace Priority
AF Focus Adj. *

S-AF
mode1
mode2
mode1
mode2
±0
q (All Targets)
5, 9, or 25 targets
All OnOn1
Off
AF Target Mode,
AF Target Point
Set 1
NMode
I
6Pos
6Pos
Off
Setting 1
On
On
K
Off

* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.

234 EN

g

161
176
177
178
162
162
162
162

*1








*2








*3

―
―





g
163
163,
180
163

ISO
F
R REC
AEL/AFL
j/Y













―
―
―
―
―

107,
164



















―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

164
164

ExposurePs
K Fn Lever FunctionuzNOff (j/Y)
Off (#)AF Stop
H
k: F
j: Ps
k: F
j: FNo.
k: F
j: Shutter
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
k: B
j: A/Valuek: Prev/Next
j: Ga
Dial1
Dial1
mode2





―

164

―



―

Fn Lever/Power LeverK Elec. Zoom Speed

Fn
Normal

―





―
―

164,
181
164
164

FunctionG

I Preset MF distance
MF Assist
MagnifyPeaking
MF Clutch
Focus Ring
Bulb/Time Focusing
Reset Lens
Button/Dial/Lever
M K Button
K Button Function
Function
F Button Function
R Function
t Function
jY Button
Functionu Function
z Functiond Function
E Function
D Functionl Function
qR FunctionP
K DialFunction
A
S
M/B
Menu
q
Dial
Direction

8
Information

Default
999.9 mOff
Off
Operative
b
On
On

Tab

EN 235

Tab

G

8
Information
236 EN

Function
Release/j/Image Stabilizer
N S-AF Release Priority
C-AF Release Priority
jL Settingsj/♦j Max fps
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps♥j
Frame Count Limiter
Pre-shutter Frames
0
Frame Count LimiterjH Settings
Max fpsj
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps♥j
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps0Pre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter
Flicker
Anti-Flicker LV
Reduction
Anti-Flicker Shooting
O K Image Stabilizer
j Image Stabilizer
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority

*1

*2

*3

g

Off
On










6fps
Off
10fps
Off
8 shots
25 shots







165
165
165,
182

10fps
Off
30fps
Off
30fps
8 shots
25 shots
Auto
OffS-IS AUTO
Fps Priority
On
Off







165,
182





―









―
165,
184
―
 86, 165
―
165
―
165

165

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

Live Guide
Live SCPArt Menu
Scene Menu
Image Only, Overall
G/InfoSettings
All OnImage Only,
Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
25, Calendar
G Settings
Picture Mode Settings
All Onj/Y Settings♥o, T, ♥T, p,
S, ♥S, q, X,
c, hMulti Function Settings
All on except WB
and ISO
Manual Shooting
Off
Q Live View
Boost
Bulb/Time
On2
Live Composite
Off
OthersOff
Art LV Mode
mode1
LV Close Up LV Close Up Mode
mode2
Settings
Live View BoostOff
Recently
qa Default SettingOffz Settings z Lock
Live View Boost
Off
Preset 1
R Grid Settings Display Color
Displayed Grid
Off
Apply Settings to EVF On
Peaking
Peaking ColorRed
Settings
Highlight Intensity
NormalImage Brightness Adj. Off
Histogram
Highlight
255
Settings
Shadow0Mode Guide
Off
Selfie Assist
On

―

―
―

―










―
―
―
―

―
―

166,
186









―
―
―

166
166





―

166







167

S 8
HDMI

Tab

G

Function
Disp/8/PC
P K Control
Settings

B
P/A/S/M/BART
SCN
q Infoqa Info
LV-Info

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

On
1080p
Off
60p Priority
Auto

166,
188

8



―


















―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

167
167





―

168


―




―
―


―
―
―
―




―



―
―
―


168
168,
190
168
168,
191

167
167

Information

USB Mode

Default

168

168

168

EN 237

Tab

G

*1

*2

*3

g

±0





―

169

1/3EV
1/3EV
Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200
AutoAll
Standard
Auto
8 min
−7
Off













169
169
169


















―



―
―

Live Time

0.5 sec―Composite Settings

1 sec





―

K Flicker Scan

Off







p
Auto
On
On
On



















1/250







#Slow Limit

1/60







x+F
#+WB

Off








―

Function
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
T Exposure
p
Shift
J
5
EV Step
ISO Step
ISO-Auto Set Upper Limit / Default
Lowest S/S Setting
ISO-Auto
K Noise Filter
Noise Reduct.
U Bulb/Time Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb

8
Information
238 EN

V Metering
AEL Metering
Spot
N SpotMetering
Spot Highlight
Spot Shadow#Custom
W #X-Sync.

Default

W

169
169
169
170
170
170,
192
170,
192
47, 170,
193
170,
194
82, 170
170
170

170,
195
170,
195
170
170

Tab

G

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

K1: YSF
K2: YF
K3: YN
K4: XN
3200×2400
1280×960
OffAuto
A±0, G±0
A±0, G±0
―
On
sRGB







171,
196







171,
196




―






―




171
 83, 171
―
171
―

171

105,
171

Off





―
―
―





―
―


―
―
―
―
―
―
―

Off
RAW+JPEG
No













172,
196
173
173
173

On
Off
j±0, k±0
Style 3

―





―
―

173
173

―



―





―

173,
197
173











―
―
―


Function
K/WB/ColorX K SetPixel Count

Xiddle
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll x
All Reset
W Keep Warm Color
Color SpaceZ Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
Priority Set
EVF
a EVF Auto Switch
EVF Adjust EVF Auto Luminance
EVF Adjust
EVF Style
V Info Settings

EVF Grid
Settings

Display Color
Displayed Grid
V Half Way Level
S-OVF

Reset
―
350dpiOff――

Basic Information,
Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
Preset 1
Off
On
Off

172
172
172
172

8
Information

Record/Erase
Y File Name
Edit Filename
dpi Settings
Copyright
Copyright Info.
Settings
Artist Name
Copyright Name
Lens Info Settings*

173
173
173

* [Reset] (Full) and [Reset] (Basic) do not reset the info for individual lenses.

EN 239Tab

G

Function
K Utilityb Pixel Mapping
Press-andhold Time

8
Information
240 EN

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

―

―

―

―



















―
―


























―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

174,
223
174














―

174
174
174
174,
198
174
174
174
174

―

―

―

174

0.7 sec
End LV a
Reset LV a Frame 0.7 sec
0.7 sec
End 6
0.7 sec
Reset 6 Frame
0.7 sec
Reset F
0.7 sec
Reset x
0.7 sec
Reset 7
0.7 sec
Reset c
0.7 sec
Reset N
Call EVF Auto Switch 0.7 sec
0.7 sec
End qa0.7 sec
Switch L
Insert Slate Tone
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
End D
0.7 sec
Reset D
0.7 sec
Switch G Lock
Call BKT Settings
0.7 sec
End Flicker Scan
0.7 sec

Level Adjust
Touchscreen Settings
Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensationc Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
Quick Sleep Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Certification―
On
Recall
Off
Hold
1 min
4h
Off
8 sec
10 sec―Record mode and file size/number of storable still pictures
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for an 16 GB SD card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Number ofstorable still
picturesImage size
(Pixel Count)

Compression

FileformatFile size (MB)10400×7792

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

125

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

21.7

5200×3904

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

21.5

10400×7792

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

125

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

10.9

5200×3904

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

21.5

IF

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

21.7

634

JF

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

10.9

1261

RAW

5240×3192

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

21.5

696

1/2.7

13.1

1054

1/4

8.9

1550

YN

1/8

4.6

3013

XSF

1/2.7

5.1

2697

1/4

3.6

3906

XN

1/8

1.9

7397

XSF

1/2.7

2

6975

1.4

9765
16836

Record mode

IF+RAW

JF+RAW

YF

XF

XF

5184×3888

3200×2400

1920×1440

1/4

JPEG

89

XN

1/8

0.9

WSF

1/2.7

1

13562

1/4

0.8

18083

WN

1/8

0.5

28721

WSF

1/2.7

0.8

18779

1/4

0.6

24413

1/8

0.3

61032

WF

WF
WN

1280×960

1024×768

8
Information

YSF

87

• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or notprint reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the numberof storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you takepictures or erase stored images.
• The actual file size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.

EN 241

Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 32 GB SDHC memory card.
Frame size

Compression

Frame rate

C4K

—

24p

17 minutes

4K—

30p, 25p, 24p

40 minutes

A-I

30p, 25p, 24p

FHD

SF
F

60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

Information
242 EN

2 hours 7 minutes
3 hours 22 minutes

A-I

40 minutesSF

2 hours 25 minutes

FN

8

20 minutes
1 hour 16 minutes

N

HD

Capacity (approx.)

60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

4 hours 11 minutes
5 hours 32 minutes• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies
with the frame rate and scene recorded.
• Individual movie files can be up to 4 GB in size. A new file is created when the size of thecurrent file reaches 4 GB.
• Individual movies can be no more than 29 minutes in length.

Specifications
 Camera
Product type
Product type

Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lenssystemLens

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens

Lens mount

Micro Four Thirds mount

Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm film camera

Approx. twice the focal length of the lens

Image pickup device
Product type4/3” Live MOS sensor

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 21.77 million pixels

No. of effective pixels

Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Screen size

17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)Aspect ratio

1.33 (4:3)

Viewfinder
TypeElectronic viewfinder with eye sensor

No. of pixels

Approx. 2.36 million dots

Magnification

100%

Eye point

Approx. 27 mm (−1 m−1)

SensorUses Live MOS sensor

Magnification

100%

Monitor
Product type3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 1.04 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)

Information

Live view

8

Shutter
Product typeComputerized focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography

Auto focus
Product typeHi-Speed Imager AF

Focusing points

121 points

Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional

Exposure control
Metering system

TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering

Metered range−2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)

Shooting modes

B: AUTO; P: Program AE (program shift available);
A: Aperture priority AE; S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual;
B: Bulb (bulb, time, and composite); C: Custom Mode; n: Movie;
ART: Art Filter; SCN: Scene mode

ISO sensitivity

LOW, 200 - 25600 (1/3, 1 EV step)

Exposure compensation±5.0 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)

EN 243

White balance
Product type

Image pickup device

Mode setting

Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera canstore up to 4 settings)

RecordingMemorySD, SDHC and SDXCUHS-II compatible

Recording system

Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data

Applicable standards

Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Sound with still pictures

Wave format

Movie

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Audio

Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)

Playback
Display format

Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display

Drive

8

Drive mode

Single-frame shooting/Sequential shooting/Self-timer

Sequential shooting

Up to 10 fps (T)Up to 30 fps (♥T, p)

Self-timer

Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized

Energy saving function

Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours(This function can be customized.)

Information

Flash
Flash control mode
X-Sync.

TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode)/MANUAL
1/250 s or slower

Wireless LAN
Compatible standard

IEEE 802.11b/g/n

Bluetooth®
Compatible standard

Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE

External connector
Micro-USB connector/HDMI micro connector (type D)

Power supply
Battery

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
WeightLithium-ion Battery ×1
125.3 mm (W) × 85.2 mm (H) × 49.7 mm (D) (4.9" × 3.4" × 2.0")(excluding protrusions)
Approx. 414 g (0.9 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)

Operating environment

244 EN

Temperature−10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F)(storage)

Humidity

30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)

Water resistance

Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (applies if camera is usedwith Olympus water-resistant lens) Flash
MODEL NO.

FL-LM3

Guide number

9.1 (ISO100•m)
12.7 (ISO200•m)

Firing angle

Covers the picture angle of a 12 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm
format)Dimensions

Approx. 43.6 mm (W) × 49.4 mm (H) × 39 mm (D) (1.7" × 1.9" × 1.5")

WeightApprox. 51 g (1.8 oz.)

Splash resistanceType

Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1

 Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO.

BLS-50

Product type

Rechargeable Lithium ion battery

Nominal voltage

DC 7.2 V

Nominal capacity

1210 mAh

No. of charge anddischarge times

Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)

Dimensions

Approx. 35.5 mm (W) × 12.8 mm (H) × 55 mm (D) (1.4" × 0.5" × 2.2")

WeightApprox. 46 g (0.1 Ib.) Lithium-ion charger
BCS-5

Rated input

AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 8.35 V, 400 mA

Charging time

Approx. 3 hours 30 minutes (room temperature)

Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/−20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)

Dimensions

Approx. 62 mm (W) × 38 mm (H) × 83 mm (D) (2.4" × 1.5" × 3.3")

Weight (without AC cable)

Approx. 70 g (0.15 Ib.)

8
Information

MODEL NO.

• The supplied power cable is for use exclusively with this camera. Do not use with otherequipment. Do not use the camera with cables for other equipment.
• The appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without noticeor obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest specifications.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo aretrademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the UnitedStates and other countries.

EN 245

9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTIONRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOTREMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
246 ENWARNING

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, serious injury or death may result.

CAUTION

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, injury may result.

NOTICE

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, damage to the equipment may result.

WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use theproduct, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only tothe power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product fromthe wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid oraerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent toclean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance thatgenerates heat, including stereo amplifiers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.

WARNING• Do not use the camera near flammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfinder.
Failure to observe this precaution could resultin eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequencyof the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfinder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the flash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, smallchildren, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) awayfrom the faces of your subjects. Firing the
flash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.

•

•

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extremechanges. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifiers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near flammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
The camera uses a lithium-ion battery
specified by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specified charger. Do not use anyother chargers.
Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
Never leave the camera on or nearelectromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
Take precautions when carrying or storingbatteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damageyou.
To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes immediately with clear, coldrunning water and seek medical attention
immediately.
If you cannot remove the battery from thecamera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove thebattery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
Always store batteries out of the reach ofsmall children and pets. If they accidentallyswallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
To prevent batteries from leaking,overheating, or causing a fire or explosion,use only batteries recommended for use withthis product.
If rechargeable batteries have not beenrecharged within the specified time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
Do not use batteries with scratches ordamage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Keep young children, infants away fromthe camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants toprevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally firing the flash into theirown eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by themoving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger isemitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noiseor smell, immediately cease use andunplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, orsmoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with barehands, which may cause a fire or burnyour hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely hightemperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch fire. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,resulting in fire.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metalparts, overheating can result in a lowtemperature burn. Pay attention to thefollowing:• When used for a long period, thecamera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a lowtemperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of thecamera’s body may be lower than theenvironmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave thecamera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:

EN 247

• Never subject batteries to strong shocks orcontinuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, orburning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomesabnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away fromfire immediately.
• If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothingor skin, remove the clothing and flush theaffected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never use lithium-ion batteries in a lowtemperature environment. Doing so may
cause generation of heat, ignition, or
explosion.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to otherdevices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets tohandle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,putting in mouth or chewing).

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
248 ENUse Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger
We strongly recommend that you use only thegenuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/or battery charger may result in fire or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.

CAUTION• Do not cover the flash with a hand whilefiring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected tohigh temperatures in a hot vehicle, near aheat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do notremove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the specified genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save ourplanet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover theirterminals and always observe local laws andregulations.

NOTICE• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to acomputer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss ofdata associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry thecamera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, notthe camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directlyat the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fires.
• Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to astrong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfinder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets orother moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, drylocation for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. Afterstorage, test the camera by turning it on andpressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used ina location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic field, radio waves, or highvoltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.

Monitor

Using the wireless LAN/
Bluetooth® functions

Disclaimer of Warranty• Turn off the camera in hospitals and otherlocations where medical equipment ispresent.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment(P. 207).
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure todisable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 207).

• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting ina playback mode failure or damage to themonitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottomof the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in thecamera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it willbe less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, themonitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any influenceon the image to be saved. Because of thecharacteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found dependingon the angle, but this is due to the structureof the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

Legal and Other Notices• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of thisproduct.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, byor concerning any content of these writtenmaterials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for any particularpurpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profits,business interruption and loss of businessinformation) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability forconsequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Insert the battery carefully as described in theoperating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor foran extended period of time.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause thecamera to turn off without displaying thebattery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,camera contact failure may result. Wipe thebattery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the first time, or if it has not been used for along period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it iswarmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especiallybefore traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may bedifficult to obtain while traveling.

EN 249Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes noresponsibility for unauthorized photographing,use or other acts that infringe upon the rights ofcopyright owners.

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these writtenmaterials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying andrecording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the priorwritten permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of theinformation contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting fromthe use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the featuresand contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.

Trademarks

9• Microsoft and Windows are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks ofApple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Apical logo is a registeredtrademark of Apical Limited.

• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and theMicro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos aretrademarks or registered trademarks of the
OLYMPUS CORPORATION in Japan, theUnited States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certification markof the Wi-Fi Alliance.

• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by OLYMPUS CORPORATION isunder license.

250 EN• The standards for camera file systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics andInformation Technology Industries Association(JEITA).
• All other company and product names areregistered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THATWAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by theowners or licensors of that software, under whichsoftware is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF file stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm

Additions/modifications by firmware
update

10

The following functions are added/modified by firmware update.

g

EVF Auto Switch

251

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.1
EVF Auto Switch
The Custom Menu (MENU[On1] and [On2].
OptionEVF Auto Switch

Ga[EVF Auto Switch]) now offers a choice of
Description[Off]: The viewfinder display does not light automatically when
you put your eye to the viewfinder. Press the u button to switch
between the viewfinder and monitor displays.
[On1]: The viewfinder display lights automatically when you put youreye to the viewfinder. Pressing the u button displays [EVF Auto
Switch] options.
[On2]: Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder display
on only if the monitor is closed. Pressing the u button displays[EVF Auto Switch] options.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.1

10

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modified default settings are as follows.
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

G Custom Menu
Tab

G

Functiona EVF Auto Switch

Default
On1

*1

*2

*3

g

―



―

173

EN 251

IndexSymbols0 (Protect) ..................................... 118
8 (Beep sound) ...............................168n Mode (movie exposure mode) .....147
P (Trimming) ...................................154
qR Function ..................................164
qa Default Setting.........................189#RC Mode ........................................216#Slow Limit.......................................195#X-Sync. ..........................................195#+WB ...............................................170
G (Index display/Calendar display) . 117
G/Info Settings ................................188
j/Y Settings ..................................166
jH Settings ............................165, 182
jL Settings .............................165, 182
j Image Stabilizer ..........................165s (Monitor brightness adjustment) .159
I/H (Underwater wide/Underwater
macro) ...........................................109
 (Single-frame erase) ..................... 119
NMode Settings..............................162
N Custom Settings .........................162
N Set Home............................162, 179
N Spot Metering .............................170
W (Language) ...........................29, 159
v (Image selection) ......................... 119
I (Face priority AF) ............................67a (Close-up playback) ..................... 117
R (Image rotation) ...........................153
V Half Way Level .............................173
V Info Settings .................................173
W Keep Warm Color .................84, 171
x+F ...............................................170z Settings .........................................167

A
A (Aperture priority mode) ..................39
Accessories ...............................214, 219
AdobeRGB ........................................105
AEL/AFL ............................................175

252 ENAEL Metering .....................................170
AE lock ........................................70, 175
AF Area Pointer .................................162
AF Focus Adj. ....................................163
AF Illuminator ....................................163
AF Limiter ..........................................163
AF Mode ..............................................80
Movie ..............................................144
AF Scanner........................................161
AF Targeting Pad ...............................162
AF Target Point ....................................66
AF tracking ..........................................81
All x ...............................................171
Anti-Flicker LV ...........................165, 184
Anti-Flicker Shooting .................165, 185
Anti-shock shooting .....................73, 142
ART (Art filter).....................................55
Art fade ................................................59
Art filter ................................................55
Art LV Mode .......................................167
Aspect ratio..........................................87
Assign to Custom Mode ....................128
Audio recording
Movie ......................................150, 151
Still image .......................................122
AUTO mode (B) ................................49
Auto Power Off ..................................174
Available recording time ....................242

B
Backlight HDR .....................................53
Backlit LCD ........................................174
Battery charge .....................................18
Battery level .........................................26
Beep sound .......................................168
Bit rate .........................................90, 149
Bluetooth® ........................................200
Bracketing..........................................132
Bulb .....................................................45
Bulb/Time Focusing ...................163, 180
Bulb/Time Monitor .............................170

Bulb/Time Timer ................................170
Button function...................................107
Movie ..............................................145

C
C-AFK (AF tracking) ........................81
C-AF Center Priority ..................161, 178
C-AF Center Start ......................161, 177
C-AF (Continuous AF) .........................80
C-AF Release Priority ........................165
C-AF Sensitivity .........................161, 176
Calendar display ........................ 117, 189
Card ............................................. 21, 211
Card Setup ........................................160
Certification........................................174
Close-up playback ............................. 117
Color Creator .....................................100
Color Filter .........................................103
Color Space ...............................105, 171
Composite Settings .....................47, 193
Compression rate ................90, 196, 241
Computer ...........................................208
Connection
Computer ........................................208
Smartphone ....................................200
Continuous AF .....................................80
Contrast .............................................101
Control Settings
Movie ..............................................146
Still image ...............................166, 186
Copyright Settings .............................172
Custom Menu ............................161, 234
Custom Self-timer ................................73
Custom Settings ................................162

D
Date/time setting (X) ..........................27
Dial Direction .....................................164
Dial Function
Movie ..............................................145
Still image .......................................164
Digital Tele-converter .........................130
dpi Settings ........................................172
DPOF.................................................120

E
Edit ....................................................153
Edit Filename.....................................172
Effect (i-Enhance) ..............................104
Electronic Zoom................................. 112
Elec. Zoom Speed
Movie ..............................................145
Still image .......................................164
Erase
All images .......................................160
Selected images ............................. 119
Single-frame ................................... 119
EVF Adjust .........................................173
EVF Auto Switch ................................173
EVF Grid Settings ..............................173
EVF Style...........................................197
EV Step .............................................169
Exif data.............................................172
Exposure compensation ......................64
Exposure Shift ...................................169
External flash units ............................215
Eye priority AF .....................................67

F
Face priority AF ...................................67
Fast-motion movie ...............................92
File format..........................................241
File Name ..........................................172
File size .............................................241
Firmware............................................159
Fisheye Compensation ......................198
Flash ....................................................93
Flash intensity control (x).................97
Flicker Reduction .......................165, 184
Flicker Scan
Movie ..............................................148
Still image .......................................194
Fn Lever Function
Movie ..............................................145
Still image ...............................164, 181
Fn Lever/Power Lever .......................164
Focus mode .........................................80
Focus Ring ........................................163

EN 253

Format ...............................................160
Frame Rate..................................90, 149G
GPS log .............................................205
Gradation ...........................................102
Grid Settings ......................................168
Grip ....................................................214

H
Half Way Rls With IS .........................165
HDMI .........................................168, 191
HDMI Output......................................146
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .............137
Highlight&Shadow Control.................106
High Res Shot (High resolution shooting)76, 143
Histogram display ................................33
Histogram Settings ............................168

I
IC recorder.........................................151
Image aspect .......................................87
Image Overlay ...................................155
Image quality
Movie (nK) ...........................89, 149
Still image (KK) ...................88, 129
Image quality settings
Movie (n Specification Settings) ...144
Still image (K Set) ................171, 196
Image size
Movie ..............................................149
Still image .........................88, 196, 241
Image Stabilizer ...........................86, 165
Movie ........................................86, 144
Image transfer to smartphone ...........203
Index display.............................. 117, 189
INFO button ........................ 33, 115, 186
Information display ..............................30
Playback ......................................... 114
Info Settings
G/Info Settings ..............................188
V Info Settings ..............................173
In-Movie Image Capture ....................156

254 EN

Installation .........................................209
Interchangeable lenses .....................212
ISO-Auto ............................................169
ISO-Auto Set .....................................169
ISO sensitivity ................................70, 80
ISO Step ............................................169

K
Keystone Comp. ................................141

L
Language setting (W) ...............29, 159
Lens Info Settings ..............................196
Lens I.S. Priority ................................165
Level Adjust .......................................174
Level Gauge ........................................33
Lever function ....................................181
Light box display ................................188
Live Bulb ......................................45, 192
Live composite photography................47
Live control ................................187, 229
Live Guide ...........................................49
Live Time .....................................45, 192
Live View Boost .................................167
Long exposure (BULB/TIME) ..............45
LV Close Up Settings.........................167
LV-Info ...............................................189
LV super control panel ...........77, 79, 229

M
M (Manual mode) ................................43
Manual focus .......................................80
Manual focus clutch (MF clutch) ........213
Menu..........................................125, 229
Menu Recall.......................................174
Metering...............................................82
MF (AF/MF toggle) ............................109
MF Assist ...........................................180
MF Clutch ..........................................213
MF (Manual focus)...............................80
Mode Guide .......................................168
Monochrome Color ............................104
Movie R .............................................150
Movie Effect .........................................59

Movie exposure mode .......................147
Movie playback .................................. 118
Movie recording .............................58, 59
Movie Tele-converter ...........................59
Movie Trimming .................................157
Multi echo ............................................59
Multi Function .................................... 113
Multi Function Settings ......................166
Multiple Exposure ..............................139

N
Noise Filter ........................................169
Noise Reduct. ....................................169
Number of storable still pictures ........241

O
OI.Share ............................................200
Old film ................................................59
Olympus Workspace .........................209
On-board charging...............................19
One shot echo .....................................59
One-touch white balance (k) ....84, 108

P
P (Program mode) ..............................37
PC software .......................................209
Peaking...................................... 110, 180
Peaking Settings................................168
Picture Mode ...............................98, 129
Picture Mode Settings .......................166
Pixel Count ........................171, 196, 241
Pixel Mapping ....................................223
Playback
Movie ...................................... 116, 118
Still image ....................................... 116
Playback Menu ..........................153, 233
Position information ...........................205
PreMF (Preset MF) ..............................81
Preset MF ............................................81
Preset MF distance............................163
Press-and-hold Time .........................174
Preview ..............................................108
Priority Set .........................................173
Pro Capture shooting...........................74

Program shift (Ps) ..............................38
Protect ............................................... 118
Ps (Program shift) ..............................38

Q
Quick Erase .......................................173
Quick Sleep Mode .............................174

R
RAW Data Edit ..................................153
RAW image .........................................88
RAW+JPEG Erase ............................173
RC Mode (#RC Mode) .....................216
Rec View ...........................................159
Remote shooting ...............................204
Reset .................................................127
Reset Lens ........................................163
Reset Protect .....................................158
Reset share Order .............................158
Rotate ................................................ 117

S
S (Shutter priority mode) .....................41
S-AFb (Single AF and Manual focus) ..
80
S-AF Release Priority ........................165
S-AF (Single AF)..................................80
Saturation ..........................................101
Scene mode ........................................50
SCN mode ..........................................50
SD card.............................................. 211
Formatting the card.........................160
Selfie Assist .......................................190
Self-timer .................................71, 73, 87
Sequential shooting .......................71, 87
Setup Menu ...............................159, 234
Shading Comp. ..................................171
Share Order ....................................... 119
Sharpness .........................................101
Shooting
Movie ................................................59
Still image .........................................34
Shooting Menu ..........................127, 231
Shooting modes...................................34

EN 255

Silent shooting .............................74, 142
Single AF .............................................80
Sleep ...................................................26
Slow motion movie ..............................92
S-OVF................................................173sRGB .................................................105
Storage ..............................................208
Super control panel ...............77, 79, 229
Super Spot AF .....................................68

T
Test Picture ........................................109
Time .....................................................45
Time Code Settings ...........................146
Time Lapse Movie .............................131
Time lapse shooting ..........................131
Touch AF..............................................36
Touch screen operations .............36, 123
Touchscreen Settings ........................174
TV ......................................................191

U
Underwater wide/Underwater macro(I/H) ........................................109
USB connection .................................208
USB Mode .........................................168
User registration ....................................9V
Video Menu ...............................144, 232

W
WB ...............................................83, 171
White balance ..............................83, 171
White balance compensation ..............85
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings ....................160
Wireless LAN .....................................200
Wireless remote control flash ............216

Z
Zoom frame AF ....................................68

256 ENdate of issue 2019.10.

WD532701